manualshive.com logo in svg

GE UR T60, Инструкция по эксплуатации

Инструкция по эксплуатации для продукта GE UR T60 доступна для бесплатного скачивания на нашем веб-сайте. Здесь вы найдете все необходимые инструкции и советы по использованию устройства. Не забудьте загрузить свой мануал с manualshive.com.

Поделиться
Скачать
background image

4-24

T60 Transformer Protection System

GE Multilin

4.3 FACEPLATE INTERFACE

4 HUMAN INTERFACES

4

For the following discussion it is assumed the 

SETTINGS 



 SYSTEM SETUP 



 BREAKERS 

 BREAKER 1(2) 



 BREAKER

1(2) PUSH BUTTON CONTROL

 setting is “Enabled” for each breaker.

c) FACEPLATE (USER KEY) CONTROL

After the 30 minute interval during which command functions are permitted after a correct command password, the user
cannot open or close a breaker via the keypad. The following discussions begin from the not-permitted state.

d) CONTROL OF TWO BREAKERS

For the following example setup, the 

(Name)

 field represents the user-programmed variable name.

For this application (setup shown below), the relay is connected and programmed for both breaker 1 and breaker 2. The
USER 1 key performs the selection of which breaker is to be operated by the USER 2 and USER 3 keys. The USER 2 key
is used to manually close the breaker and the USER 3 key is used to manually open the breaker.

e) CONTROL OF ONE BREAKER

For this application the relay is connected and programmed for breaker 1 only. Operation for this application is identical to
that described above for two breakers.

4.3.7 MENUS

a) NAVIGATION

Press the MENU key to select the desired header display page (top-level menu). The header title appears momentarily fol-
lowed by a header display page menu item. Each press of the MENU key advances through the following main heading
pages:

•

Actual values.

•

Settings.

•

Commands.

•

Targets.

•

User displays (when enabled).

ENTER COMMAND

PASSWORD

This message appears when the USER 1, USER 2, or USER 3 key is pressed and a

COMMAND PASSWORD

 is required; i.e. if 

COMMAND PASSWORD

 is enabled and no com-

mands have been issued within the last 30 minutes.

Press USER 1

To Select Breaker

This message appears if the correct password is entered or if none is required. This mes-
sage will be maintained for 30 seconds or until the USER 1 key is pressed again.

BKR1-(Name) SELECTED

USER 2=CLS/USER 3=OP

This message is displayed after the USER 1 key is pressed for the second time. Three
possible actions can be performed from this state within 30 seconds as per items 

(1)

, 

(2)

and 

(3)

 below:

(1)

USER 2 OFF/ON

To Close BKR1-(Name)

If the USER 2 key is pressed, this message appears for 20 seconds. If the USER 2 key is
pressed again within that time, a signal is created that can be programmed to operate an
output relay to close breaker 1.

(2)

USER 3 OFF/ON

To Open BKR1-(Name)

If the USER 3 key is pressed, this message appears for 20 seconds. If the USER 3 key is
pressed again within that time, a signal is created that can be programmed to operate an
output relay to open breaker 1.

(3)

BKR2-(Name) SELECTED

USER 2=CLS/USER 3=OP

If the USER 1 key is pressed at this step, this message appears showing that a different
breaker is selected. Three possible actions can be performed from this state as per 

(1)

,

(2)

 and 

(3)

. Repeatedly pressing the USER 1 key alternates between available breakers.

Pressing keys other than USER 1, 2 or 3 at any time aborts the breaker control function.

Содержание UR T60

Страница 1: ...nergy 650 Markland Street Markham Ontario Canada L6C 0M1 Tel 1 905 927 7070 Fax 1 905 927 5098 Internet http www GEDigitalEnergy com Title Page GE Multilin s Quality Management System is registered to ISO9001 2008 QMI 005094 UL A3775 1601 0090 W2 GE Digital Energy IISO 9001 G N E I L M I U T L TE S I R G E E D R LISTED 52TL IND CONT EQ E83849 ...

Страница 2: ...r Digital Energy Multilin and GE Multilin are trademarks or registered trademarks of GE Multilin Inc The contents of this manual are the property of GE Multilin Inc This documentation is furnished on license and may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the permission of GE Multilin The content of this manual is for informational use only and is subject to change without notice Part number...

Страница 3: ...1 16 1 5 USING THE RELAY 1 5 1 FACEPLATE KEYPAD 1 17 1 5 2 MENU NAVIGATION 1 17 1 5 3 MENU HIERARCHY 1 17 1 5 4 RELAY ACTIVATION 1 17 1 5 5 RELAY PASSWORDS 1 18 1 5 6 FLEXLOGIC CUSTOMIZATION 1 18 1 5 7 COMMISSIONING 1 19 2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 2 1 INTRODUCTION 2 1 1 OVERVIEW 2 1 2 1 2 ORDERING 2 3 2 1 3 REPLACEMENT MODULES 2 8 2 2 SPECIFICATIONS 2 2 1 PROTECTION ELEMENTS 2 10 2 2 2 USER PROGRAMMABL...

Страница 4: ...E 3 45 3 4 5 CONFIGURING THE MANAGED ETHERNET SWITCH MODULE 3 49 3 4 6 UPLOADING T60 SWITCH MODULE FIRMWARE 3 52 3 4 7 ETHERNET SWITCH SELF TEST ERRORS 3 54 4 HUMAN INTERFACES 4 1 ENERVISTA UR SETUP SOFTWARE INTERFACE 4 1 1 INTRODUCTION 4 1 4 1 2 CREATING A SITE LIST 4 1 4 1 3 ENERVISTA UR SETUP OVERVIEW 4 1 4 1 4 ENERVISTA UR SETUP MAIN WINDOW 4 3 4 2 EXTENDED ENERVISTA UR SETUP FEATURES 4 2 1 SE...

Страница 5: ...ON 5 132 5 5 4 FLEXLOGIC EXAMPLE 5 132 5 5 5 FLEXLOGIC EQUATION EDITOR 5 137 5 5 6 FLEXLOGIC TIMERS 5 137 5 5 7 FLEXELEMENTS 5 138 5 5 8 NON VOLATILE LATCHES 5 142 5 6 GROUPED ELEMENTS 5 6 1 OVERVIEW 5 143 5 6 2 SETTING GROUP 5 143 5 6 3 DISTANCE 5 144 5 6 4 POWER SWING DETECT 5 162 5 6 5 LOAD ENCROACHMENT 5 171 5 6 6 TRANSFORMER ELEMENTS 5 173 5 6 7 PHASE CURRENT 5 181 5 6 8 NEUTRAL CURRENT 5 193...

Страница 6: ...2 6 VIRTUAL OUTPUTS 6 6 6 2 7 REMOTE DEVICES 6 6 6 2 8 DIGITAL COUNTERS 6 7 6 2 9 SELECTOR SWITCHES 6 7 6 2 10 FLEX STATES 6 7 6 2 11 ETHERNET 6 7 6 2 12 DIRECT INPUTS 6 8 6 2 13 DIRECT DEVICES STATUS 6 8 6 2 14 IEC 61850 GOOSE INTEGERS 6 9 6 2 15 EGD PROTOCOL STATUS 6 9 6 2 16 TELEPROTECTION CHANNEL TESTS 6 10 6 2 17 ETHERNET SWITCH 6 10 6 3 METERING 6 3 1 METERING CONVENTIONS 6 11 6 3 2 TRANSFOR...

Страница 7: ...STA SECURITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM 8 3 1 OVERVIEW 8 15 8 3 2 ENABLING THE SECURITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM 8 15 8 3 3 ADDING A NEW USER 8 15 8 3 4 MODIFYING USER PRIVILEGES 8 16 9 COMMISSIONING 9 1 DIFFERENTIAL CHARACTERISTIC TEST 9 1 1 DESCRIPTION 9 1 9 2 DIFFERENTIAL CHARACTERISTIC TEST EXAMPLES 9 2 1 INTRODUCTION 9 3 9 2 2 TEST EXAMPLE 1 9 4 9 2 3 TEST EXAMPLE 2 9 9 9 2 4 TEST EXAMPLE 3 9 10 9 2 5 TEST E...

Страница 8: ...PING B 4 1 MODBUS MEMORY MAP B 9 B 4 2 DATA FORMATS B 74 C IEC 61850 COMMUNICATIONS C 1 OVERVIEW C 1 1 INTRODUCTION C 1 C 1 2 COMMUNICATION PROFILES C 1 C 1 3 FILE TRANSFER BY IEC 61850 C 2 C 2 SERVER DATA ORGANIZATION C 2 1 OVERVIEW C 3 C 2 2 GGIO1 DIGITAL STATUS VALUES C 3 C 2 3 GGIO2 DIGITAL CONTROL VALUES C 3 C 2 4 GGIO3 DIGITAL STATUS AND ANALOG VALUES FROM RECEIVED GOOSE DATAC 3 C 2 5 GGIO4 ...

Страница 9: ... C 6 2 ACSI MODELS CONFORMANCE STATEMENT C 23 C 6 3 ACSI SERVICES CONFORMANCE STATEMENT C 24 C 7 LOGICAL NODES C 7 1 LOGICAL NODES TABLE C 27 D IEC 60870 5 104 COMMS D 1 IEC 60870 5 104 PROTOCOL D 1 1 INTEROPERABILITY DOCUMENT D 1 D 1 2 POINT LIST D 9 E DNP COMMUNICATIONS E 1 DEVICE PROFILE DOCUMENT E 1 1 DNP V3 00 DEVICE PROFILE E 1 E 1 2 IMPLEMENTATION TABLE E 4 E 2 DNP POINT LISTS E 2 1 BINARY ...

Страница 10: ...x T60 Transformer Protection System GE Multilin TABLE OF CONTENTS ...

Страница 11: ...σήμανση με αυτό το σύμβολο το οποίο μπορεί να περιλαμβάνει γράμματα για να δηλώσουν το κάδμιο Cd τον μόλυβδο Pb ή τον υδράργυρο Hg Για την κατάλληλη ανακύκλωση επιστρέψτε την μπαταρία στον προμηθευτή σας ή σε καθορισμένο σημείο συλλογής Για περισσότερες πληροφορίες δείτε www recyclethis info ES Eliminacion de baterias Este producto contiene una batería que no se pueda eliminar como basura normal s...

Страница 12: ...info PL Pozbywanie się zużytych baterii Ten produkt zawiera baterie które w Unii Europejskiej mogą być usuwane tylko jako posegregowane odpady komunalne Dokładne informacje dotyczące użytych baterii znajdują się w dokumentacji produktu Baterie oznaczone tym symbolem mogą zawierać dodatkowe oznaczenia literowe wskazujące na zawartość kadmu Cd ołowiu Pb lub rtęci Hg Dla zapewnienia właściwej utyliza...

Страница 13: ... Bu sembolle işaretlenmiş piller Kadmiyum Cd Kurşun Pb ya da Civa Hg içerebilir Doğru geri dönüşüm için ürünü yerel tedarikçinize geri veriniz ya da özel işaretlenmiş toplama noktlarına atınız Daha fazla bilgi için www recyclethis info Global Contacts From GE Part Number 1604 0021 A1 GE Publication Number GEK 113574 North America 905 294 6222 Latin America 55 11 3614 1700 Europe Middle East Africa...

Страница 14: ...xiv T60 Transformer Protection System GE Multilin 0 1 BATTERY DISPOSAL 0 BATTERY DISPOSAL 0 ...

Страница 15: ...ms are included Instruction manual if ordered GE EnerVista CD includes the EnerVista UR Setup software and manuals in PDF format Mounting screws For product information instruction manual updates and the latest software updates please visit the GE Digital Energy website If there is any noticeable physical damage or any of the contents listed are missing please contact GE Multilin immediately GE MU...

Страница 16: ...f cabling and auxiliary equipment installed in stations can be even further reduced to 20 to 70 of the levels common in 1990 to achieve large cost reductions This requires placing even more functions within the IEDs Users of power equipment are also interested in reducing cost by improving power quality and personnel productivity and as always in increasing system reliability and efficiency These ...

Страница 17: ...the device Virtual outputs can also serve as virtual inputs to FlexLogic equations The analog inputs and outputs are signals that are associated with transducers such as Resistance Temperature Detec tors RTDs The CT and VT inputs refer to analog current transformer and voltage transformer signals used to monitor AC power lines The UR series relays support 1 A and 5 A CTs The remote inputs and outp...

Страница 18: ... metering input output control hmi communications or any functional entity in the system Employing OOD OOP in the software architecture of the T60 achieves the same features as the hardware architecture modularity scalability and flexibility The application software for any UR series device for example feeder protection transformer protection distance protection is constructed by combining objects...

Страница 19: ...ble of displaying 800 x 600 or higher in high color mode 16 bit color RS232 and or Ethernet port for communications to the relay The following qualified modems have been tested to be compliant with the T60 and the EnerVista UR Setup software US Robotics external 56K FaxModem 5686 US Robotics external Sportster 56K X2 PCTEL 2304WT V 92 MDC internal modem 1 3 2 INSTALLATION After ensuring the minimu...

Страница 20: ...tallation The files will be installed in the directory indicated and the installation program will automatically create icons and add EnerVista UR Setup to the Windows start menu 9 Click Finish to end the installation The UR series device will be added to the list of installed IEDs in the EnerVista Launchpad window as shown below 1 3 3 CONFIGURING THE T60 FOR SOFTWARE ACCESS a OVERVIEW The user ca...

Страница 21: ...E Multilin F485 converter or compatible RS232 to RS485 converter is required See the F485 instruction manual for details 1 Verify that the latest version of the EnerVista UR Setup software is installed available from the GE EnerVista CD or online from http www gedigitalenergy com multilin See the Software Installation section for installation details 2 Connect the computer to the F485 and the F485...

Страница 22: ...mmunications Proceed to the Connecting to the T60 section to begin communications c CONFIGURING ETHERNET COMMUNICATIONS Before starting verify that the Ethernet network cable is properly connected to the Ethernet port on the back of the relay To set up the relay for Ethernet communications you define a Site then add the relay as a Device at that site The computer and UR device must be on the same ...

Страница 23: ...curs ensure that the three EnerVista UR Setup values entered in the previous steps correspond to the relay setting values 12 Click OK when the relay order code has been received The new device will be added to the Site List window or Online window located in the top left corner of the main EnerVista UR Setup window The Site Device has now been configured for Ethernet communications Proceed to the ...

Страница 24: ...o access the T60 from a computer through Ethernet first assign an IP address to the relay from the front panel keyboard 1 Press the MENU key until the SETTINGS menu is displayed 2 Navigate to the SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK IP ADDRESS setting 3 Enter an IP address of 1 1 1 1 and select the ENTER key to save the value 4 In the same menu select the SUBNET IP MASK setting 5 Enter a ...

Страница 25: ... desktop right click the My Network Places icon and select Properties to open the network con nections window 2 Right click the Local Area Connection icon and select Properties 3 Select the Internet Protocol TCP IP item from the list provided and click the Properties button 4 Click on the Use the following IP address box ...

Страница 26: ...nfiguration If the following sequence of messages appears when entering the C WINNT ping 1 1 1 1 command Pinging 1 1 1 1 with 32 bytes of data Request timed out Request timed out Request timed out Request timed out Ping statistics for 1 1 1 1 Packets Sent 4 Received 0 Lost 4 100 loss Approximate round trip time in milli seconds Minimum 0ms Maximum 0ms Average 0 ms Pinging 1 1 1 1 with 32 bytes of ...

Страница 27: ...pecific DNS suffix IP Address 1 1 1 2 Subnet Mask 255 0 0 0 Default Gateway C WINNT It may be necessary to restart the laptop for the change in IP address to take effect Windows 98 or NT Before using the Quick Connect feature through the Ethernet port it is necessary to disable any configured proxy settings in Internet Explorer 1 Start the Internet Explorer software 2 Select the Tools Internet Opt...

Страница 28: ...e Windows desktop right click the My Network Places icon and select Properties to open the network con nections window 2 Right click the Local Area Connection icon and select the Properties item 3 Select the Internet Protocol TCP IP item from the list provided and click the Properties button 4 Set the computer to Obtain a relay address automatically as shown below If this computer is used to conne...

Страница 29: ... indicator 4 The Display Properties settings can now be edited printed or changed according to user specifications Refer to chapter 4 in this manual and the EnerVista UR Setup Help File for more information about the using the EnerVista UR Setup software interface QUICK ACTION HOT LINKS The EnerVista UR Setup software has several new quick action buttons that provide users with instant access to s...

Страница 30: ...nnects to the computer using a straight through serial cable A shielded twisted pair 20 22 or 24 AWG connects the F485 converter to the T60 rear communications port The converter termi nals GND are connected to the T60 communication module COM terminals Refer to the CPU communica tions ports section in chapter 3 for option details The line should be terminated with an R C network that is 120 Ω 1 n...

Страница 31: ...n enabled 1 5 3 MENU HIERARCHY The setting and actual value messages are arranged hierarchically The header display pages are indicated by double scroll bar characters while sub header pages are indicated by single scroll bar characters The header display pages represent the highest level of the hierarchy and the sub header display pages fall below this level The MESSAGE UP and DOWN keys move with...

Страница 32: ...cific personnel There are two user password security access levels COMMAND and SETTING 1 COMMAND The COMMAND access level restricts the user from making any settings changes but allows the user to perform the fol lowing operations change state of virtual inputs clear event records clear oscillography records operate user programmable pushbuttons 2 SETTING The SETTING access level allows the user t...

Страница 33: ...current in comparison to other devices on the cor responding system 2 Visual verification of active alarms relay display messages and LED indications 3 LED test 4 Visual inspection for any damage corrosion dust or loose wires 5 Event recorder file download with further events analysis Out of service maintenance 1 Check wiring connections for firmness 2 Analog values currents voltages RTDs analog i...

Страница 34: ...1 20 T60 Transformer Protection System GE Multilin 1 5 USING THE RELAY 1 GETTING STARTED 1 ...

Страница 35: ...fter the event for viewing on a personal computer PC These tools significantly reduce troubleshooting time and simplify report generation in the event of a sys tem fault A faceplate RS232 port may be used to connect to a PC for the programming of settings and the monitoring of actual val ues A variety of communications modules are available Two rear RS485 ports allow independent access by operatin...

Страница 36: ...e amps Metering Calculate 2nd and 5th harmonics Harmonic restraint TYPICAL CONFIGURATION the AC signal path is configurable 59N 24 Winding 1 Amps Amps 51N 1 50N 1 51N 2 50N 2 Calculate 3I_0 Calculate 3I_0 Amps 50P 2 51P 2 50P 1 21G 51P 1 21P 50G 1 51G 1 87RGF 1 50G 2 51G 2 87RGF 2 27X 81U 81O Transducer Input TM FlexElement 68 78 67P 67N 3V_0 Amps 50BF 2 50BF 1 49 59P 27P 59X T60 Transformer Prote...

Страница 37: ...its with traditional CTs and VTs are shown below The following features are not available when the T60 is ordered with three CT VT modules breaker arcing current load encroachment and breaker failure Table 2 2 OTHER DEVICE FUNCTIONS FUNCTION FUNCTION FUNCTION Breaker arcing current I2t FlexElements 16 Time synchronization over SNTP Breaker control FlexLogic equations Transducer inputs and outputs ...

Страница 38: ... Form A no monitoring outputs 6A 6A 6A 6A 6A 2 Form A voltage with optional current and 2 Form C outputs 8 digital inputs 6B 6B 6B 6B 6B 2 Form A voltage with optional current and 4 Form C outputs 4 digital inputs 6C 6C 6C 6C 6C 8 Form C outputs 6D 6D 6D 6D 6D 16 digital inputs 6E 6E 6E 6E 6E 4 Form C outputs 8 digital inputs 6F 6F 6F 6F 6F 8 Fast Form C outputs 6G 6G 6G 6G 6G 4 Form A voltage wit...

Страница 39: ...ts 6A 6A 6A 2 Form A voltage with optional current and 2 Form C outputs 8 digital inputs 6B 6B 6B 2 Form A voltage with optional current and 4 Form C outputs 4 digital inputs 6C 6C 6C 8 Form C outputs 6D 6D 6D 16 digital inputs 6E 6E 6E 4 Form C outputs 8 digital inputs 6F 6F 6F 8 Fast Form C outputs 6G 6G 6G 4 Form A voltage with optional current outputs 8 digital inputs 6H 6H 6H 6 Form A voltage...

Страница 40: ... voltage MOSFET outputs 4D 4D 16 digital inputs with Auto Burnishing 4L 4L 14 Form A no monitoring Latching outputs 67 67 8 Form A no monitoring outputs 6A 6A 2 Form A voltage with optional current and 2 Form C outputs 8 digital inputs 6B 6B 2 Form A voltage with optional current and 4 Form C outputs 4 digital inputs 6C 6C 8 Form C outputs 6D 6D 16 digital inputs 6E 6E 4 Form C outputs 8 digital i...

Страница 41: ...puts 6B 2 Form A voltage with optional current and 4 Form C outputs 4 digital inputs 6C 8 Form C outputs 6D 16 digital inputs 6E 4 Form C outputs 8 digital inputs 6F 8 Fast Form C outputs 6G 4 Form A voltage with optional current outputs 8 digital inputs 6H 6 Form A voltage with optional current outputs 4 digital inputs 6K 4 Form C and 4 Fast Form C outputs 6L 2 Form A current with optional voltag...

Страница 42: ...current and 4 Form C outputs 4 digital inputs 6C 8 Form C outputs 6D 16 digital inputs 6E 4 Form C outputs 8 digital inputs 6F 8 Fast Form C outputs 6G 4 Form A voltage with optional current outputs 8 digital inputs 6H 6 Form A voltage with optional current outputs 4 digital inputs 6K 4 Form C and 4 Fast Form C outputs 6L 2 Form A current with optional voltage and 2 Form C outputs 8 digital inputs...

Страница 43: ...N 4 Form A current with optional voltage outputs 8 digital inputs 6P 6 Form A current with optional voltage outputs 4 digital inputs 6R 2 Form A no monitoring and 2 Form C outputs 8 digital inputs 6S 2 Form A no monitoring and 4 Form C outputs 4 digital inputs 6T 4 Form A no monitoring outputs 8 digital inputs 6U 6 Form A no monitoring outputs 4 digital inputs 6V 2 Form A outputs 1 Form C output 2...

Страница 44: ...s greater for two windings setup INSTANTANEOUS DIFFERENTIAL Pickup level 2 00 to 30 00 pu in steps of 0 01 Dropout level 97 to 98 of pickup Level accuracy 0 5 of reading or 1 of rated whichever is greater for two windings setup Operate time 20 ms at 3 pickup at 60 Hz PHASE DISTANCE Characteristic mho memory polarized or offset or quad memory polarized or non direc tional selectable individually pe...

Страница 45: ... 2 0 x CT rating 0 5 of reading or 1 of rated which ever is greater 2 0 x CT rating 1 5 of reading Pickup delay 0 to 600 00 s in steps of 0 01 Dropout delay 0 to 600 00 s in steps of 0 01 Operate time 1 power system cycle PHASE NEUTRAL GROUND TOC Current Phasor or RMS Pickup level 0 000 to 30 000 pu in steps of 0 001 Dropout level 97 to 98 of pickup Level accuracy 0 1 to 2 0 CT 0 5 of reading or 0...

Страница 46: ... 20 ms whichever is greater Operate time 30 ms at 1 10 pickup at 60 Hz AUXILIARY OVERVOLTAGE Pickup level 0 000 to 3 000 pu in steps of 0 001 Dropout level 97 to 98 of pickup Level accuracy 0 5 of reading from 10 to 208 V Pickup delay 0 to 600 00 s in steps of 0 01 Reset delay 0 to 600 00 s in steps of 0 01 Timing accuracy 3 of operate time or 4 ms whichever is greater Operate time 30 ms at 1 10 p...

Страница 47: ...1 Hysteresis for max freq diff 0 00 to 0 10 Hz in steps of 0 01 Dead source function None LV1 DV2 DV1 LV2 DV1 or DV2 DV1 xor DV2 DV1 DV2 L Live D Dead PILOT AIDED SCHEMES Permissive Overreaching Transfer Trip POTT POWER SWING DETECT Functions Power swing block Out of step trip Characteristic Mho or Quad Measured impedance Positive sequence Blocking tripping modes 2 step or 3 step Tripping mode Ear...

Страница 48: ...ction control and FlexLogic USER PROGRAMMABLE LEDs Number 48 plus trip and alarm Programmability from any logical variable contact or vir tual input Reset mode self reset or latched LED TEST Initiation from any digital input or user program mable condition Number of tests 3 interruptible at any time Duration of full test approximately 3 minutes Test sequence 1 all LEDs on Test sequence 2 all LEDs ...

Страница 49: ...channel for NN days 16 channels for NN days PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNIT Output format per IEEE C37 118 standard Number of channels 14 synchrophasors 8 analogs 16 digi tals TVE total vector error 1 Triggering frequency voltage current power rate of change of frequency user defined Reporting rate 1 2 5 10 12 15 20 25 30 50 or 60 times per second Number of clients One over TCP IP port two over UDP IP por...

Страница 50: ...symmetrical amperes 250 V maximum primary current to external CT AC VOLTAGE VT rated secondary 50 0 to 240 0 V VT ratio 1 00 to 24000 00 Nominal frequency 20 to 65 Hz Relay burden 0 25 VA at 120 V Conversion range 1 to 275 V Voltage withstand continuous at 260 V to neutral 1 min hr at 420 V to neutral CONTACT INPUTS Dry contacts 1000 Ω maximum Wet contacts 300 V DC maximum Selectable thresholds 17...

Страница 51: ...20 V Maximum DC voltage 60 V Voltage loss hold up 20 ms duration at nominal NOTE Low range is DC only HIGH RANGE Nominal DC voltage 125 to 250 V Minimum DC voltage 88 V Maximum DC voltage 300 V Nominal AC voltage 100 to 240 V at 50 60 Hz Minimum AC voltage 88 V at 25 to 100 Hz Maximum AC voltage 265 V at 25 to 100 Hz Voltage loss hold up 200 ms duration at nominal ALL RANGES Volt withstand 2 Highe...

Страница 52: ... range 0 75 of full scale for 0 to 20 mA range 99 Settling time to a step change 100 ms Isolation 1 5 kV Driving signal any FlexAnalog quantity Upper and lower limit for the driving signal 90 to 90 pu in steps of 0 001 ETHERNET SWITCH HIGH VOLTAGE TYPE 2S Nominal DC voltage 110 to 240 V DC Minimum DC voltage 88 V DC Maximum DC voltage 300 V DC Input Current 0 9 A DC maximum Nominal AC voltage 100 ...

Страница 53: ...n loss of 1db for either direction The worst case optical power budget between two type 2T or 2S modules using a single fiber cable is To calculate the maximum fiber length divide the worst case opti cal power budget by the cable attenuation per unit distance speci fied in the manufacturer data sheets For example typical attenuation for 62 5 125 μm glass fiber optic cable is approxi mately 2 8 dB ...

Страница 54: ...ategory II Ingress protection IP20 front IP10 back Noise 0 dB INTERFACE TYPE TYPICAL DISTANCE RS422 1200 m G 703 100 m EMITTER FIBER TYPE TRANSMIT POWER RECEIVED SENSITIVITY POWER BUDGET 820 nm LED Multimode 20 dBm 30 dBm 10 dB 1300 nm LED Multimode 21 dBm 30 dBm 9 dB 1300 nm ELED Singlemode 23 dBm 32 dBm 9 dB 1300 nm Laser Singlemode 1 dBm 30 dBm 29 dB 1550 nm Laser Singlemode 5 dBm 30 dBm 35 dB ...

Страница 55: ...lass A and B Voltage interruption and ripple DC IEC60255 11 12 ripple 200 ms interrupts Radiated and conducted emissions CISPR11 CISPR22 IEC60255 25 Class A Sinusoidal vibration IEC60255 21 1 Class 1 Shock and bump IEC60255 21 2 Class 1 Seismic IEC60255 21 3 Class 1 Power magnetic immunity IEC61000 4 8 Level 5 Pulse magnetic immunity IEC61000 4 9 Level 4 Damped magnetic immunity IEC61000 4 10 Leve...

Страница 56: ...ccumulated on the faceplate display a dry cloth can be used Units that are stored in a de energized state should be powered up once per year for one hour continuously to avoid deterioration of electrolytic capacitors COMPLIANCE APPLICABLE COUNCIL DIRECTIVE ACCORDING TO CE Low voltage directive EN 60255 5 EMC directive EN 60255 26 EN 50263 EN 61000 6 5 C UL US UL 508 UL 1053 C22 2 No 14 EAC Machine...

Страница 57: ... the removable modules and is itself removable to allow mounting on doors with limited rear depth The case dimensions are shown below along with panel cutout details for panel mounting When planning the location of your panel cutout ensure that provision is made for the faceplate to swing open without interference to or from adjacent equipment The relay must be mounted such that the faceplate sits...

Страница 58: ...st cover that fits over the faceplate which must be removed when attempting to access the keypad or RS232 communications port The case dimensions are shown below along with panel cutout details for panel mounting When planning the location of your panel cutout ensure that provision is made for the faceplate to swing open without interference to or from adjacent equipment 18 370 466 60 mm 842808A1 ...

Страница 59: ...pplied with the relay Figure 3 4 T60 VERTICAL DIMENSIONS ENHANCED PANEL 7 48 190 0 mm 15 00 381 0 mm 13 56 344 4 mm 1 38 35 2 mm 9 58 243 4 mm 7 00 177 7 mm 4 00 101 6 mm 7 10 180 2 mm 13 66 347 0 mm 14 03 356 2 mm 0 20 5 1 mm 1 55 39 3 mm 4 Places 0 213 5 41 mm Front of Panel Mounting Bracket Vertical Enhanced Front View Vertical Enhanced Top View Vertical Enhanced Mounting Panel CUTOUT Front of ...

Страница 60: ...the UR DVD and the GE Digital Energy website GEK 113180 UR Series UR V Side Mounting Front Panel Assembly Instructions GEK 113181 Connecting a Remote UR V Enhanced Front Panel to a Vertical UR Device Instruction Sheet GEK 113182 Connecting a Remote UR V Enhanced Front Panel to a Vertically Mounted Horizontal UR Device Instruction Sheet For side mounting T60 devices with the standard front panel us...

Страница 61: ...GE Multilin T60 Transformer Protection System 3 5 3 HARDWARE 3 1 DESCRIPTION 3 Figure 3 6 T60 VERTICAL SIDE MOUNTING INSTALLATION STANDARD PANEL ...

Страница 62: ...energized The relay being modular in design allows for the withdrawal and insertion of modules Modules must only be replaced with like modules in their original factory configured slots The enhanced faceplate can be opened to the left once the thumb screw has been removed as shown below This allows for easy accessibility of the modules for withdrawal The new wide angle hinge assembly in the enhanc...

Страница 63: ...rom the relay Record the original loca tion of the module to ensure that the same or replacement module is inserted into the correct slot Modules with current input provide automatic shorting of external CT circuits To properly insert a module ensure that the correct module type is inserted into the correct slot position The ejector inserter clips located at the top and at the bottom of each modul...

Страница 64: ...umber assignments which are three characters long assigned in order by module slot position row number and column letter Two slot wide modules take their slot designation from the first slot position nearest to CPU module which is indicated by an arrow marker on the terminal block See the following figure for an example of rear terminal assignments NOTE X W V U T S P N M L K J H G F B R 8 4 7 3 6 ...

Страница 65: ...GE Multilin T60 Transformer Protection System 3 9 3 HARDWARE 3 1 DESCRIPTION 3 Figure 3 11 EXAMPLE OF MODULES IN F AND H SLOTS ...

Страница 66: ... IF TERMINAL IS PROVIDED U6a U8a U5b U7b U5a U7a U6c U8c U5c U7c CONTACT INPUT U1a CONTACT INPUT U4c COMMON U5b COMMON U7b COMMON U1b CONTACT INPUT U2a CONTACT INPUT U5a CONTACT INPUT U3c CONTACT INPUT U6a CONTACT INPUT U8a CONTACT INPUT U1c CONTACT INPUT U3a CONTACT INPUT U5c CONTACT INPUT U7c CONTACT INPUT U7a CONTACT INPUT U2c SURGE CONTACT INPUT U4a CONTACT INPUT U6c CONTACT INPUT U8c U1a U8b ...

Страница 67: ...DC power for dry contact input connections and a critical failure relay see the Typical wiring diagram earlier The critical failure relay is a form C device that will be energized once control power is applied and the relay has successfully booted up with no critical self test failures If on going self test diagnostic checks detect a critical failure see the Self test errors section in chapter 7 o...

Страница 68: ...same as the phase current input Each AC current input has an isolating transformer and an automatic shorting mechanism that shorts the input when the module is withdrawn from the chassis There are no internal ground connections on the current inputs Current transformers with 1 to 50000 A primaries and 1 A or 5 A secondaries can be used CT VT modules with a sensitive ground input are also available...

Страница 69: ... Ground connection to neutral must be on the source side UNSHIELDED CABLE LOAD A B C N G Ground outside CT Source LOAD SHIELDED CABLE 996630A5 A B C Source To ground must be on load side Stress cone shields NOTE 1a 1b 1c 2a 2b 2c 3a 4a 5a 6a 7a 8a 3b 4b 5c 6c 7c 8c 3c 4c Current inputs 8F 8G 8L and 8M modules 4 CTs and 4 VTs Voltage inputs VA VB VC VX VA VB VC VX IA IC IB IG IA5 IC5 IB5 IG5 IA1 IC...

Страница 70: ... two inputs per common return When a contact input output module is ordered four inputs per common is used If the inputs must be isolated per row then two inputs per common return should be selected 4D module The tables and diagrams on the following pages illustrate the module types 6A etc and contact arrangements that may be ordered for the relay Since an entire row is used for a single contact o...

Страница 71: ...inue to read the form A contact as being closed after it has closed and subsequently opened when measured as an impedance The solution to this problem is to use the voltage measuring trigger input of the relay test set and connect the form A contact through a voltage dropping resistor to a DC voltage source If the 48 V DC output of the power supply is used as a source a 500 Ω 10 W resistor is appr...

Страница 72: ...A 6a 6c 2 Inputs 6 Fast Form C 6a 6c 2 Inputs 6 Form A 7a 7c 2 Inputs 7 Fast Form C 7a 7c 2 Inputs 7a 7c 2 Inputs 8a 8c 2 Inputs 8 Fast Form C 8a 8c 2 Inputs 8a 8c 2 Inputs 6K MODULE 6L MODULE 6M MODULE 6N MODULE TERMINAL ASSIGNMENT OUTPUT TERMINAL ASSIGNMENT OUTPUT OR INPUT TERMINAL ASSIGNMENT OUTPUT OR INPUT TERMINAL ASSIGNMENT OUTPUT OR INPUT 1 Form C 1 Form A 1 Form A 1 Form A 2 Form C 2 Form ...

Страница 73: ... 6 Solid State 7a 7c 2 Inputs 7a 7c 2 Inputs 7 Form A 7 Not Used 8a 8c 2 Inputs 8a 8c 2 Inputs 8 Form A 8 Solid State 4B MODULE 4C MODULE 4D MODULE 4L MODULE TERMINAL ASSIGNMENT OUTPUT TERMINAL ASSIGNMENT OUTPUT TERMINAL ASSIGNMENT OUTPUT TERMINAL ASSIGNMENT OUTPUT 1 Not Used 1 Not Used 1a 1c 2 Inputs 1 2 Outputs 2 Solid State 2 Solid State 2a 2c 2 Inputs 2 2 Outputs 3 Not Used 3 Not Used 3a 3c 2 ...

Страница 74: ...3 18 T60 Transformer Protection System GE Multilin 3 2 WIRING 3 HARDWARE 3 Figure 3 17 CONTACT INPUT AND OUTPUT MODULE WIRING 1 of 2 842762A3 CDR ...

Страница 75: ...IN 8c COMMON 7b SURGE 8c 7c 8b I V I V I V I V DIGITAL I O 6N 1b 2b 3b 4b 6c 1a 2a 3a 4a 5a 6a 1c 2c 3c 4c 5c 5b 1 2 3 4 8a 7b 7a CONTACT IN 7a CONTACT IN 5a CONTACT IN 7c CONTACT IN 5c CONTACT IN 8a CONTACT IN 6a CONTACT IN 8c CONTACT IN 6c COMMON 7b COMMON 5b SURGE 8c 7c 8b DIGITAL I O 6T 1b 2b 3b 4b 6c 1a 2a 3a 4a 5a 6a 1c 2c 3c 4c 5c 5b 1 2 3 4 8a 7b 7a CONTACT IN 7a CONTACT IN 5a CONTACT IN 7...

Страница 76: ...each contact group The maximum external source voltage for this arrangement is 300 V DC The voltage threshold at which each group of four contact inputs will detect a closed contact input is programmable as 17 V DC for 24 V sources 33 V DC for 48 V sources 84 V DC for 110 to 125 V sources and 166 V DC for 250 V sources Figure 3 19 DRY AND WET CONTACT INPUT CONNECTIONS Wherever a tilde symbol appea...

Страница 77: ...ange of state was sensed Then within 25 to 50 ms this current is slowly reduced to 3 mA as indicated above The 50 to 70 mA peak current burns any film on the con tacts allowing for proper sensing of state changes If the external device contact is bouncing the auto burnishing starts when external device contact bouncing is over Another important difference between the auto burnishing input module a...

Страница 78: ... arranged as three ter minals per row with a total of eight rows A given row may be used for either inputs or outputs with terminals in column a having positive polarity and terminals in column c having negative polarity Since an entire row is used for a single input output channel the name of the channel is assigned using the module slot position and row number Each module also requires that a co...

Страница 79: ...3 RTD CONNECTIONS Three wire shielded cable RTD terminals Maximum total lead resistance 25 ohms for Platinum RTDs Route cable in separate conduit from current carrying conductors RTD 859736A1 CDR RTD terminals RTD RTD For RTD RTD SURGE 1 1 2 2 8b 1a 1b 2a Hot Hot Return Comp Comp 2c 1c ...

Страница 80: ...es two additional communication ports or a managed six port Ether net switch depending on the installed CPU module In the following table multiple Ethernet ports are supported but only one can be used at a time For example the 10Base F normal port and 10Base T alternate port are supported in the 9G module but only one can be used at a time The CPU modules do not require a surge ground connection T...

Страница 81: ...nd at remote device Co axial cable Co axial cable Shielded twisted pairs 842765A7b CDR CPU 9S COMMON D1a D2a D3a D4b D4a BNC BNC IRIG B output IRIG B input Co axial cable Co axial cable Shielded twisted pairs Ground at remote device RS485 COM2 Ground at remote device NORMAL 10 100Base T COMMON D1a D2a D3a D4b D4a BNC BNC IRIG B output IRIG B input CPU Co axial cable Co axial cable Shielded twisted...

Страница 82: ...stors typically 100 ohms between the shield and ground at each grounding point Each relay should also be daisy chained to the next one in the link A maximum of 32 relays can be connected in this manner without exceeding driver capability For larger systems additional serial channels must be added It is also possible to use commercially available repeaters to have more than 32 relays on a single ch...

Страница 83: ...B IRIG B is a standard time code format that allows stamping of events to be synchronized among connected devices The IRIG B code allows time accuracies of up to 100 ns Using the IRIG B input the T60 operates an internal oscillator with 1 µs resolution and accuracy The IRIG time code formats are serial width modulated codes that can be either DC level shifted or amplitude modulated AM Third party ...

Страница 84: ... to other equipment By using one IRIG B serial connec tion several UR series relays can be synchronized The IRIG B repeater has a bypass function to maintain the time signal even when a relay in the series is powered down Figure 3 28 IRIG B REPEATER Using an amplitude modulated receiver causes errors up to 1 ms in event time stamping NOTE ...

Страница 85: ...ys can be connected in a single ring Figure 3 29 DIRECT INPUT AND OUTPUT SINGLE CHANNEL CONNECTION The interconnection for dual channel Type 7 communications modules is shown below Two channel modules allow for a redundant ring configuration That is two rings can be created to provide an additional independent data path The required connections are UR1 Tx1 to UR2 Rx1 UR2 Tx1 to UR3 Rx1 UR3 Tx1 to ...

Страница 86: ...EE C37 94 820 nm 128 kbps multi mode LED 2 channels 2S Six port managed Ethernet switch with high voltage power supply 2T Six port managed Ethernet switch with low voltage power supply 72 1550 nm single mode laser 1 channel 73 1550 nm single mode laser 2 channels 74 Channel 1 RS422 channel 2 1550 nm single mode laser 75 Channel 1 G 703 channel 2 1550 nm single mode laser 76 IEEE C37 94 820 nm 64 k...

Страница 87: ...7K fiber laser module Figure 3 33 LASER FIBER MODULES 7N Channel 1 RS422 channel 2 1300 nm single mode ELED 7P Channel 1 RS422 channel 2 1300 nm single mode laser 7Q Channel 1 G 703 channel 2 1300 nm single mode laser 7R G 703 1 channel 7S G 703 2 channels 7T RS422 1 channel 7V RS422 2 channels 2 clock inputs 7W RS422 2 channels Table 3 4 CHANNEL COMMUNICATION OPTIONS Sheet 2 of 2 MODULE SPECIFICA...

Страница 88: ...ignments section earlier in this chapter All pin interconnections are to be maintained for a connection to a multiplexer Figure 3 35 TYPICAL PIN INTERCONNECTION BETWEEN TWO G 703 INTERFACES Pin nomenclature may differ from one manufacturer to another Therefore it is not uncommon to see pin outs numbered TxA TxB RxA and RxB In such cases it can be assumed that A is equivalent to and B is equivalent...

Страница 89: ... fully inserted Figure 3 36 G 703 TIMING SELECTION SWITCH SETTING c G 703 OCTET TIMING If octet timing is enabled on this 8 kHz signal will be asserted during the violation of bit 8 LSB necessary for connecting to higher order systems When T60s are connected back to back octet timing should be disabled off d G 703 TIMING MODES There are two timing modes for the G 703 module internal timing mode an...

Страница 90: ...er transmitter module Since timing is returned as it is received the timing source is expected to be from the G 703 line side of the interface Figure 3 37 G 703 MINIMUM REMOTE LOOPBACK MODE In dual loopback mode the multiplexers are active and the functions of the circuit are divided into two with each receiver transmitter pair linked together to deconstruct and then reconstruct their respective s...

Страница 91: ...d timing ST connections However when used in two channel applications certain criteria must be followed since there is one clock input for the two RS422 channels The system will function cor rectly if the following connections are observed and your data module has a terminal timing feature Terminal timing is a common feature to most synchronous data units that allows the module to accept timing fr...

Страница 92: ...ge of the Tx clock in the center of the Tx data bit Figure 3 42 CLOCK AND DATA TRANSITIONS d RECEIVE TIMING The RS422 interface utilizes NRZI MARK modulation code and therefore does not rely on an Rx clock to recapture data NRZI MARK is an edge type invertible self clocking code Data module 1 Data module 2 Signal name Signal name SD A Send data TT A Terminal timing TT B Terminal timing SD B Send d...

Страница 93: ...eed maxi mum optical input power to the receiver Figure 3 43 RS422 AND FIBER INTERFACE CONNECTION Connections shown above are for multiplexers configured as DCE data communications equipment units 3 3 7 G 703 AND FIBER INTERFACE The figure below shows the combined G 703 plus fiber interface configuration at 64 kbps The 7E 7F 7G 7Q and 75 mod ules are used in configurations where channel 1 is emplo...

Страница 94: ...nd 77 modules Fiber optic cable type 50 nm or 62 5 µm core diameter optical fiber Fiber optic mode multi mode Fiber optic cable length up to 2 km Fiber optic connector type ST Wavelength 820 40 nm Connection as per all fiber optic connections a Tx to Rx connection is required The UR series C37 94 communication module can be connected directly to any compliant digital multiplexer that supports the ...

Страница 95: ... and at the bottom of each module must be pulled simultaneously in order to release the module for removal Before performing this action control power must be removed from the relay The original location of the module should be recorded to help ensure that the same or replacement module is inserted into the correct slot 2 Remove the module cover screw 3 Remove the top cover by sliding it towards t...

Страница 96: ...3 40 T60 Transformer Protection System GE Multilin 3 3 DIRECT INPUT OUTPUT COMMUNICATIONS 3 HARDWARE 3 Figure 3 45 IEEE C37 94 TIMING SELECTION SWITCH SETTING ...

Страница 97: ... n 1 or 64 kbps Fiber optic cable type 9 125 μm core diameter optical fiber Fiber optic mode single mode ELED compatible with HP HFBR 1315T transmitter and HP HFBR 2316T receiver Fiber optic cable length up to 10 km Fiber optic connector type ST Wavelength 1300 40 nm Connection as per all fiber optic connections a Tx to Rx connection is required The UR series C37 94SM communication module can be c...

Страница 98: ...t the bottom of each module must be pulled simultaneously in order to release the module for removal Before performing this action control power must be removed from the relay The original location of the module should be recorded to help ensure that the same or replacement module is inserted into the correct slot 2 Remove the module cover screw 3 Remove the top cover by sliding it towards the rea...

Страница 99: ...GE Multilin T60 Transformer Protection System 3 43 3 HARDWARE 3 3 DIRECT INPUT OUTPUT COMMUNICATIONS 3 Figure 3 46 C37 94SM TIMING SELECTION SWITCH SETTING ...

Страница 100: ...DE 500 self test warning will be issued 3 4 2 MANAGED ETHERNET SWITCH MODULE HARDWARE The type 2S and 2T managed Ethernet switch modules provide two 10 100Base T and four multimode ST 100Base FX external Ethernet ports accessible through the rear of the module In addition a serial console port is accessible from the front of the module requires the front panel faceplate to be open The pin assignme...

Страница 101: ...nel trouble LED will be illuminated and the ENET MODULE OFFLINE error message will be displayed It will be necessary to configure the Ethernet switch and then place it online This involves two steps 1 Configuring the network settings on the local PC 2 Configuring the T60 switch module through EnerVista UR Setup These procedures are described in the following sections When the T60 is properly confi...

Страница 102: ...re familiar with the UR keypad you can use it to set up the network IP address and check the Modbus slave address and Modbus TCP port 2 Ensure that the PC and the T60 are on the same IP network If your computer is on another network or has a dynamic IP address assigned upon a network login then setup your own IP address as follows 2 1 From the Windows Start Menu select the Settings Network Connect...

Страница 103: ... 2 5 Save the settings by clicking the OK button 2 6 Click the Close button to exit the LAN properties window 3 Connect your PC to port 1 or port 2 of the Ethernet switch module with an RJ 45 CAT5 cable 4 Verify that the two LEDs beside the connected port turn green 5 After few seconds you should see your local area connection attempting to connect to the switch Once connected check your IP addres...

Страница 104: ... that the local PC is properly configured on the same network as the T60 device as shown in the previous sec tion 1 Launch the EnerVista UR Setup software 2 Click the Device Setup button 3 Click the Add Site button This will launch the Device Setup window 4 Set the Interface option to Ethernet and enter the IP Address Slave Address and Modbus Port values as shown below 5 Click the Read Order Code ...

Страница 105: ...ared and that the T60 displays the MAC address of the Ethernet switch in the Actual Values Status Ethernet Switch window The T60 device and the Ethernet switch module communications setup is now complete 3 4 5 CONFIGURING THE MANAGED ETHERNET SWITCH MODULE A suitable IP gateway and subnet mask must be assigned to both the switch and the UR relay for correct operation The Switch has been shipped wi...

Страница 106: ...e T60 and prompt as follows when complete 3 Cycle power to the T60 and switch module to activate the new settings b SAVING THE ETHERNET SWITCH SETTINGS TO A SETTINGS FILE The T60 allows the settings information for the Ethernet switch module to be saved locally as a settings file This file con tains the advanced configuration details for the switch not contained within the standard T60 settings fi...

Страница 107: ... to a settings file before uploading a new settings file It is highly recommended to place the switch offline while transferring setting files to the switch When transferring settings files from one switch to another the user must reconfigure the IP address 1 Select the desired device from site tree in the online window 2 Select the Settings Product Setup Communications Ethernet Switch Ethernet Sw...

Страница 108: ... switch module Firmware upgrades using the serial port TFTP and FTP are described in detail in the switch module manual b SELECTING THE PROPER SWITCH FIRMWARE VERSION The latest switch module firmware is available as a download from the GE Multilin web site Use the following procedure to determine the version of firmware currently installed on your switch 1 Log into the switch using the EnerVista ...

Страница 109: ...pgrading the firmware 3 After saving the settings file proceed with the firmware upload by selecting Yes to the above warning Another window will open asking you to point to the location of the firmware file to be uploaded 4 Select the firmware file to be loaded on to the Switch and select the Open option The following window will pop up indicating that the firmware file transfer is in progress If...

Страница 110: ... MODULE OFFLINE No response has been received from the Ethernet module after five successive polling attempts Loss of switch power IP gateway subnet Incompatibility between the CPU and the switch module UR port port 7 configured incorrectly or blocked Switch IP address assigned to another device in the same network PORT 1 EVENTS to PORT 6 EVENTS ETHERNET PORT 1 OFFLINE to ETHERNET PORT 6 OFFLINE A...

Страница 111: ... definition must first be created See the EnerV ista UR Setup Help File or refer to the Connecting EnerVista UR Setup with the T60 section in Chapter 1 for details 4 1 3 ENERVISTA UR SETUP OVERVIEW a ENGAGING A DEVICE The EnerVista UR Setup software may be used in on line mode relay connected to directly communicate with the T60 relay Communicating relays are organized and grouped by communication...

Страница 112: ... to oldest Oscillography The oscillography waveform traces and digital states are used to provide a visual display of power system and relay operation data captured during specific triggered events f FILE SUPPORT Execution Any EnerVista UR Setup file which is double clicked or opened will launch the application or provide focus to the already opened application If the file was a settings file has ...

Страница 113: ...ew features are added or existing features are enhanced or modified The EEPROM DATA ERROR message displayed after upgrading downgrading the firmware is a resettable self test message intended to inform users that the Modbus addresses have changed with the upgraded firmware This message does not signal any problems when appearing after firmware upgrades 4 1 4 ENERVISTA UR SETUP MAIN WINDOW The Ener...

Страница 114: ...4 4 T60 Transformer Protection System GE Multilin 4 1 ENERVISTA UR SETUP SOFTWARE INTERFACE 4 HUMAN INTERFACES 4 Figure 4 1 ENERVISTA UR SETUP SOFTWARE MAIN WINDOW 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 842786A2 CDR 10 ...

Страница 115: ...template feature is disabled by default The following procedure describes how to enable the settings tem plate for UR series settings files 1 Select a settings file from the offline window of the EnerVista UR Setup main screen 2 Right click on the selected device or settings file and select the Template Mode Create Template option The settings file template is now enabled and the file tree display...

Страница 116: ...le by clicking on them The setting available to view will be displayed against a yellow background as shown below Figure 4 3 SETTINGS TEMPLATE VIEW TWO SETTINGS SPECIFIED AS EDITABLE 6 Click on Save to save changes to the settings template 7 Proceed through the settings tree to specify all viewable settings c ADDING PASSWORD PROTECTION TO A TEMPLATE It is highly recommended that templates be saved...

Страница 117: ...y those settings available for editing Display all settings with settings not available for editing greyed out Use the following procedure to only display settings available for editing 1 Select an installed device or a settings file from the tree menu on the left of the EnerVista UR Setup main screen 2 Apply the template by selecting the Template Mode View In Template Mode option 3 Enter the temp...

Страница 118: ...cified by the template but all settings will be shown The effect of applying the template to the phase time overcurrent settings is shown below Figure 4 6 APPLYING TEMPLATES VIA THE VIEW ALL SETTINGS COMMAND e REMOVING THE SETTINGS TEMPLATE It may be necessary at some point to remove a settings template Once a template is removed it cannot be reapplied and it will be necessary to define a new sett...

Страница 119: ...N ENTRIES The following procedure describes how to lock individual entries of a FlexLogic equation 1 Right click the settings file or online device and select the Template Mode Create Template item to enable the set tings template feature 2 Select the FlexLogic FlexLogic Equation Editor settings menu item By default all FlexLogic entries are specified as viewable and displayed against a yellow bac...

Страница 120: ...wn below and on the front panel display Figure 4 9 SECURED FLEXLOGIC IN GRAPHICAL VIEW b LOCKING FLEXLOGIC EQUATIONS TO A SERIAL NUMBER A settings file and associated FlexLogic equations can also be locked to a specific UR serial number Once the desired FlexLogic entries in a settings file have been secured use the following procedure to lock the settings file to a specific serial number 1 Select ...

Страница 121: ... infor mation can be compared with the T60 actual values at any later date to determine if security has been compromised The traceability information is only included in the settings file if a complete settings file is either transferred to the T60 device or obtained from the T60 device Any partial settings transfers by way of drag and drop do not add the traceability information to the settings f...

Страница 122: ... relay configuration since the settings file was saved a SETTINGS FILE TRACEABILITY INFORMATION The serial number and file transfer date are saved in the settings files when they sent to a T60 device The T60 serial number and file transfer date are included in the settings file device definition within the EnerVista UR Setup offline window as shown in the example below Figure 4 12 DEVICE DEFINITIO...

Страница 123: ...EL INFORMATION SERIAL NUMBER ACTUAL VALUES PRODUCT INFO MODEL INFORMATION LAST SETTING CHANGE c ADDITIONAL TRACEABILITY RULES The following additional rules apply for the traceability feature If the user changes any settings within the settings file in the offline window then the traceability information is removed from the settings file If the user creates a new settings file then no traceability...

Страница 124: ...nerVista UR Setup software The front panel interface consists of LED panels an RS232 port keypad LCD display control pushbuttons and optional user programmable pushbuttons The faceplate is hinged to allow easy access to the removable modules There is also a removable dust cover that fits over the faceplate which must be removed in order to access the keypad panel The following figure shows the hor...

Страница 125: ...on has been cleared these latched conditions can also be reset via the SETTINGS INPUT OUTPUTS RESETTING menu The RS232 port is intended for connection to a portable PC The USER keys are used by the breaker control feature Figure 4 18 TYPICAL LED INDICATOR PANEL FOR ENHANCED FACEPLATE The status indicators in the first column are described below IN SERVICE This LED indicates that control power is a...

Страница 126: ... phase instantaneous overcurrent phase undervoltage etc This means that the phase A B and C operate oper ands for individual protection elements are ORed to turn on or off the phase A B or C LEDs VOLTAGE This LED indicates voltage was involved CURRENT This LED indicates current was involved FREQUENCY This LED indicates frequency was involved OTHER This LED indicates a composite function was involv...

Страница 127: ...on when the operate operand associated with the element is asserted and remain on until the RESET button on the front panel is pressed after the operand is reset All elements that are able to discriminate faulted phases can independently turn off or on the phase A B or C LEDs This includes phase instantaneous overcurrent phase undervoltage etc This means that the phase A B and C operate oper ands ...

Страница 128: ...mmed To match the pre printed label the LED settings must be entered as shown in the User programmable LEDs section of chapter 5 The LEDs are fully user programmable The default labels can be replaced by user printed labels for both panels as explained in the following section Figure 4 21 LED PANEL 2 DEFAULT LABELS 4 3 3 CUSTOM LABELING OF LEDS a ENHANCED FACEPLATE The following procedure requires...

Страница 129: ...insert tool from the package and bend the tabs as described in the following procedures These tabs will be used for removal of the default and custom LED labels It is important that the tool be used EXACTLY as shown below with the printed side containing the GE part number facing the user The label package shipped with every T60 contains the three default labels shown below the custom label templa...

Страница 130: ...procedure describes how to remove the LED labels from the T60 enhanced front panel and insert the custom labels 1 Use the knife to lift the LED label and slide the label tool underneath Make sure the bent tabs are pointing away from the relay 2 Slide the label tool under the LED label until the tabs snap out as shown below This will attach the label tool to the LED label ...

Страница 131: ...he pocket until the text is properly aligned with the LEDs as shown below The following procedure describes how to remove the user programmable pushbutton labels from the T60 enhanced front panel and insert the custom labels 1 Use the knife to lift the pushbutton label and slide the tail of the label tool underneath as shown below Make sure the bent tab is pointing away from the relay ...

Страница 132: ...UMAN INTERFACES 4 2 Slide the label tool under the user programmable pushbutton label until the tabs snap out as shown below This will attach the label tool to the user programmable pushbutton label 3 Remove the tool and attached user programmable pushbutton label as shown below ...

Страница 133: ...t mode or enters a decimal point The HELP key may be pressed at any time for context sensitive help messages The ENTER key stores altered setting values 4 3 6 BREAKER CONTROL a INTRODUCTION The T60 can interface with associated circuit breakers In many cases the application monitors the state of the breaker which can be presented on faceplate LEDs along with a breaker trouble indication Breaker op...

Страница 134: ...ading pages Actual values Settings Commands Targets User displays when enabled ENTER COMMAND PASSWORD This message appears when the USER 1 USER 2 or USER 3 key is pressed and a COMMAND PASSWORD is required i e if COMMAND PASSWORD is enabled and no com mands have been issued within the last 30 minutes Press USER 1 To Select Breaker This message appears if the correct password is entered or if none ...

Страница 135: ...TUP ACTUAL VALUES STATUS Press the MENU key until the header for the first Actual Values page appears This page contains system and relay status information Repeatedly press the MESSAGE keys to display the other actual value headers SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP Press the MENU key until the header for the first page of Settings appears This page contains settings to configure the relay SETTINGS SYSTEM SE...

Страница 136: ...ay be programmed to allow the relay to be customized for specific appli cations One example is the Message Scratchpad Use the following procedure to enter alphanumeric text messages For example to enter the text Breaker 1 1 Press the decimal to enter text edit mode 2 Press the VALUE keys until the character B appears press the decimal key to advance the cursor to the next position FLASH MESSAGE TI...

Страница 137: ...ars the relay will be in Programmed state and the In Service LED will turn on e ENTERING INITIAL PASSWORDS The T60 supports password entry from a local or remote connection Local access is defined as any access to settings or commands via the faceplate interface This includes both keypad entry and the faceplate RS232 connection Remote access is defined as any access to settings or commands via any...

Страница 138: ... In the event that a password has been lost forgotten submit the corresponding encrypted password from the PASSWORD SECURITY menu to the Factory for decoding g INVALID PASSWORD ENTRY By default when an incorrect Command or Setting password has been entered via the faceplate interface three times within three minutes the LOCAL ACCESS DENIED FlexLogic operand is set to On and the T60 does not allow ...

Страница 139: ... page 5 41 USER PROGRAMMABLE FAULT REPORT See page 5 42 OSCILLOGRAPHY See page 5 43 DATA LOGGER See page 5 46 DEMAND See page 5 47 USER PROGRAMMABLE LEDS See page 5 48 USER PROGRAMMABLE SELF TESTS See page 5 52 CONTROL PUSHBUTTONS See page 5 53 USER PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTONS See page 5 54 FLEX STATE PARAMETERS See page 5 60 USER DEFINABLE DISPLAYS See page 5 60 DIRECT I O See page 5 63 TELEPROTECTI...

Страница 140: ...IC FLEXLOGIC EQUATION EDITOR See page 5 137 FLEXLOGIC TIMERS See page 5 137 FLEXELEMENTS See page 5 138 NON VOLATILE LATCHES See page 5 142 SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1 See page 5 143 SETTING GROUP 2 SETTING GROUP 6 SETTINGS CONTROL ELEMENTS TRIP BUS See page 5 228 SETTING GROUPS See page 5 230 SELECTOR SWITCH See page 5 231 UNDERFREQUENCY See page 5 237 OVERFREQUENCY See page 5 238 S...

Страница 141: ...VICES See page 5 271 REMOTE INPUTS See page 5 272 REMOTE DPS INPUTS See page 5 273 REMOTE OUTPUTS DNA BIT PAIRS See page 5 273 REMOTE OUTPUTS UserSt BIT PAIRS See page 5 274 RESETTING See page 5 274 DIRECT INPUTS See page 5 275 DIRECT OUTPUTS See page 5 275 TELEPROTECTION See page 5 278 IEC 61850 GOOSE ANALOGS See page 5 280 IEC 61850 GOOSE UINTEGERS See page 5 281 SETTINGS TRANSDUCER I O DCMA INP...

Страница 142: ... specified in per unit pu calculated quantities pu quantity actual quantity base quantity Where the current source is from a single CT the base quantity is the nominal secondary or primary current of the CT Use the secondary current base to convert per unit current settings to from a secondary current value and use the primary cur rent base to convert to from a primary current value Where the curr...

Страница 143: ...indication follow the operate state of the element and self resets once the operate element condition clears When set to Latched the target message and LED indication will remain visible after the element output returns to logic 0 until a RESET command is received by the relay EVENTS setting This setting is used to control whether the pickup dropout or operate states are recorded by the event reco...

Страница 144: ...ttings and becomes available to protection and metering elements in the UR platform Individual names can be given to each source to help identify them more clearly for later use For example in the scheme shown in the above diagram the user configures one source to be the sum of CT1 and CT2 and can name this source as Wdg1 I Once the sources have been configured the user has them available as selec...

Страница 145: ...uired by the user to know how to connect the relay to external circuits Bank identification consists of the letter designation of the slot in which the CT VT module is mounted as the first character followed by numbers indicating the channel either 1 or 5 See the HardFiber instruction manual for designations of HardFiber voltage and current banks For three phase channel sets the number of the lowe...

Страница 146: ...om a local or remote connection Local access is defined as any access to settings or commands via the faceplate interface This includes both keypad entry and the through the faceplate RS232 port Remote access is defined as any access to settings or commands via any rear communications port This includes both Ethernet and RS485 connections Any changes to the local or remote passwords enables this f...

Страница 147: ...URITY CHANGE LOCAL PASSWORDS Proper password codes are required to enable each access level A password consists of 1 to 10 numerical characters When a CHANGE COMMAND PASSWORD or CHANGE SETTING PASSWORD setting is programmed to Yes via the front panel interface the following message sequence is invoked 1 ENTER NEW PASSWORD ____________ 2 VERIFY NEW PASSWORD ____________ 3 NEW PASSWORD HAS BEEN STOR...

Страница 148: ... Re enter the password in the Confirm New Password field 3 Click the Change button This button will not be active until the new password matches the confirmation password 4 If the original password is not 0 then enter the original password in the Enter Password field and click the Send Password to Device button 5 The new password is accepted and a value is assigned to the ENCRYPTED PASSWORD item I...

Страница 149: ... to the restricted access level Note that the access level will set as restricted if control power is cycled COMMAND LEVEL ACCESS TIMEOUT This setting specifies the length of inactivity no local or remote access required to return to restricted access from the command password level SETTING LEVEL ACCESS TIMEOUT This setting specifies the length of inactivity no local or remote access required to r...

Страница 150: ...o on transition of the FlexLogic operand is detected the time out is restarted The status of this timer is updated every 5 seconds The following settings are available through the remote EnerVista UR Setup interface only Select the Settings Product Setup Security menu item to display the security settings window The Remote Settings Authorization setting is used for remote Ethernet or RS485 interfa...

Страница 151: ... are very susceptible to noise Some customers prefer very low currents to display as zero while others prefer the current be displayed even when the value reflects noise rather than the actual signal The T60 applies a cut off value to the magnitudes and angles of the measured currents If the magnitude is below the cut off level it is substi tuted with zero This applies to phase and ground current ...

Страница 152: ...00 A 13811 2 V 66 4 V 720 5 watts Any calculated power value below this cut off will not be displayed As well the three phase energy data will not accumu late if the total power from all three phases does not exceed the power cut off Lower the VOLTAGE CUT OFF LEVEL and CURRENT CUT OFF LEVEL with care as the relay accepts lower signals as valid measurements Unless dictated otherwise by a specific a...

Страница 153: ...gramma ble pushbuttons can provide extra security if required For example to assign user programmable pushbutton 1 to clear demand records the following settings should be applied 1 Assign the clear demand function to pushbutton 1 by making the following change in the SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP CLEAR RELAY RECORDS menu CLEAR DEMAND PUSHBUTTON 1 ON 2 Set the properties for user programmable pushbutton ...

Страница 154: ...when ordering either an Ethernet or RS485 port The rear COM2 port be used for either RS485 or RRTD communications COMMUNICATIONS SERIAL PORTS See below MESSAGE NETWORK See page 5 18 MESSAGE MODBUS PROTOCOL See page 5 18 MESSAGE DNP PROTOCOL See page 5 19 MESSAGE DNP IEC104 POINT LISTS See page 5 22 MESSAGE IEC 61850 PROTOCOL See page 5 23 MESSAGE WEB SERVER HTTP PROTOCOL See page 5 36 MESSAGE TFTP...

Страница 155: ...a unique address from 1 to 254 The baud rate for RRTD communications can be selected as 300 1200 2400 4800 9600 14400 or 19200 bps If the RS485 COM2 port is used for an RRTD then there must not be any other devices connected in the daisy chain for any other purpose The port is strictly dedicated to RRTD usage when COM2 USAGE is selected as RRTD Power must be cycled to the T60 for changes to the CO...

Страница 156: ...nd addresses from 248 and up are reserved by the Modbus protocol specification and so their use here is not recom mended Address 0 is the broadcast address that all Modbus slave devices listen to When MODBUS SLAVE ADDRESS is set to 0 the UR accepts broadcast messages but in compliance with protocol specifications for broadcast messages never replies Addresses do not have to be sequential but no tw...

Страница 157: ...RESPONSE MAX RETRIES 10 Range 1 to 255 in steps of 1 MESSAGE DNP UNSOL RESPONSE DEST ADDRESS 1 Range 0 to 65519 in steps of 1 MESSAGE DNP CURRENT SCALE FACTOR 1 Range 0 001 0 01 0 1 1 10 100 1000 10000 100000 MESSAGE DNP VOLTAGE SCALE FACTOR 1 Range 0 001 0 01 0 1 1 10 100 1000 10000 100000 MESSAGE DNP POWER SCALE FACTOR 1 Range 0 001 0 01 0 1 1 10 100 1000 10000 100000 MESSAGE DNP ENERGY SCALE FA...

Страница 158: ...is set to Network TCP the DNP protocol can be used over TCP IP on channels 1 or 2 When this value is set to Network UDP the DNP protocol can be used over UDP IP on chan nel 1 only Refer to Appendix E for additional information on the DNP protocol MESSAGE DNP OTHER DEFAULT DEADBAND 30000 Range 0 to 100000000 in steps of 1 MESSAGE DNP TIME SYNC IIN PERIOD 1440 min Range 1 to 10080 min in steps of 1 ...

Страница 159: ...le if the DNP VOLTAGE SCALE FACTOR setting is set to 1000 all DNP analog input points that are voltages will be returned with values 1000 times smaller for example a value of 72000 V on the T60 will be returned as 72 These settings are useful when analog input values must be adjusted to fit within cer tain ranges in DNP masters Note that a scale factor of 0 1 is equivalent to a multiplier of 10 th...

Страница 160: ... to one basis The DNP ADDRESS setting is the DNP slave address This number identifies the T60 on a DNP communications link Each DNP slave should be assigned a unique address The DNP TCP CONNECTION TIMEOUT setting specifies a time delay for the detection of dead network TCP connections If there is no data traffic on a DNP TCP connection for greater than the time specified by this setting the connec...

Страница 161: ...ous block any points assigned after the first Off point are ignored Changes to the DNP IEC 60870 5 104 point lists will not take effect until the T60 is restarted g IEC 61850 PROTOCOL PATH SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS IEC 61850 PROTOCOL ANALOG INPUT MME POINTS Point 0 Off Range any FlexAnalog parameter MESSAGE Point 1 Off Range any FlexAnalog parameter MESSAGE Point 255 Off Range any Flex...

Страница 162: ...L GSSE GOOSE CONFIGURATION TRANSMISSION The general transmission settings are shown below PATH SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS IEC 61850 PROTOCOL GSSE GOOSE CONFIGURATION TRANSMISSION GENERAL The DEFAULT GSSE GOOSE UPDATE TIME sets the time between GSSE or GOOSE messages when there are no remote out put state changes to be sent When remote output data changes GSSE or GOOSE messages are sent ...

Страница 163: ...C address to be set This address must be a multicast address the least significant bit of the first byte must be set In T60 releases previous to 5 0x the destination Ethernet MAC address was determined automatically by taking the sending MAC address that is the unique local MAC address of the T60 and setting the multicast bit The GOOSE VLAN PRIORITY setting indicates the Ethernet priority of GOOSE...

Страница 164: ...sets 1 through 8 the integrity GOOSE message will still continue to be sent at the pre configured rate even if no changes in the data items are detected The GOOSE functionality was enhanced to prevent the relay from flooding a communications network with GOOSE mes sages due to an oscillation being created that is triggering a message The T60 has the ability of detecting if a data item in one of th...

Страница 165: ...n required to transfer IEC 61850 data items between two devices The general steps required for transmission configuration are 1 Configure the transmission dataset 2 Configure the GOOSE service settings 3 Configure the data The general steps required for reception configuration are 1 Configure the reception dataset 2 Configure the GOOSE service settings 3 Configure the data Table 5 1 GOOSE RETRANSM...

Страница 166: ...d must match the configuration on the receiver the default value is 0 Set the CONFIG GSE 1 CONFREV value This value changes automatically as described in IEC 61850 part 7 2 For this example it can be left at its default value 3 Configure the data by making the following changes in the PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATION IEC 61850 PROTO COL GGIO1 STATUS CONFIGURATION settings menu Set GGIO1 INDICATION 1 to...

Страница 167: ...ned by the GGIO1 ST Ind1 stVal value in the sending device The above settings will be automatically populated by the EnerVista UR Setup software when a com plete SCD file is created by third party substation configurator software For intercommunication between T60 IEDs the fixed DNA UserSt dataset can be used The DNA UserSt dataset contains the same DNA and UserSt bit pairs that are included in GS...

Страница 168: ...ings must be set to Dataset Item 1 and Dataset Item 2 These remote input FlexLogic operands will then change state in accordance with the status values of the data items in the configured dataset Double point status values may be included in the GOOSE dataset Received values are populated in the GGIO3 ST IndPos1 stVal and higher items Floating point analog values originating from MMXU logical node...

Страница 169: ...is required without the IEC 61850 client server feature then server scanning can be disabled to increase CPU resources When server scanning is disabled there will be not updated to the IEC 61850 logical node sta tus values in the T60 Clients will still be able to connect to the server T60 relay but most data values will not be updated This setting does not affect GOOSE GSSE operation Changes to th...

Страница 170: ...tting frequency 90 Hz power factor 2 The GGIO1 status configuration points are shown below PATH SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS IEC 61850 PROTOCOL GGIO1 STATUS CONFIGURATION The NUMBER OF STATUS POINTS IN GGIO1 setting specifies the number of Ind single point status indications that are instantiated in the GGIO1 logical node Changes to the NUMBER OF STATUS POINTS IN GGIO1 setting will not ta...

Страница 171: ...ALOG IN 1 MIN This setting specifies the minimum value for each analog value Refer to IEC 61850 7 1 and 61850 7 3 for details This minimum value is used to determine the deadband The deadband is used in the determina tion of the deadbanded magnitude from the instantaneous magnitude ANALOG IN 1 MAX This setting defines the maximum value for each analog value Refer to IEC 61850 7 1 and 61850 7 3 for...

Страница 172: ...tatus value GGIO5 ST UIntIn1 This setting is stored as an 32 bit unsigned integer value The report control configuration settings are shown below PATH SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS IEC 61850 PROTOCOL REPORT CONTROL CONFIGURATION CONFIGURABLE REPORT 1 REPORT 1 DATASET ITEMS To create the dataset for logical node LN program the ITEM 1 to ITEM 64 settings to a value from the list of IEC 61850...

Страница 173: ...perating counter status attribute OpCnt increments with every operation Frequent breaker operation may result in very large OpCnt values over time This setting allows the OpCnt to be reset to 0 for XCBR1 XCBR CONFIGURATION XCBR1 ST LOC OPERAND Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE XCBR2 ST LOC OPERAND Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE XCBR3 ST LOC OPERAND Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE XCBR6 ...

Страница 174: ...eb pages to a web browser such as Microsoft Internet Explorer or Mozilla Firefox This feature is available only if the T60 has the ethernet option installed The web pages are organized as a series of menus that can be accessed starting at the T60 Main Menu Web pages are available showing DNP and IEC 60870 5 104 points lists Modbus registers event records fault reports etc The web pages can be acce...

Страница 175: ... buffers no more than two masters should actively communicate with the T60 at one time Do not set more than one protocol to the same TCP UDP port number as this results in unreliable operation of those protocols TFTP PROTOCOL TFTP MAIN UDP PORT NUMBER 69 Range 1 to 65535 in steps of 1 MESSAGE TFTP DATA UDP PORT 1 NUMBER 0 Range 0 to 65535 in steps of 1 MESSAGE TFTP DATA UDP PORT 2 NUMBER 0 Range 0...

Страница 176: ... SNTP functionality is enabled at the same time as IRIG B the IRIG B signal provides the time value to the T60 clock for as long as a valid signal is present If the IRIG B signal is removed the time obtained from the SNTP server is used If either SNTP or IRIG B is enabled the T60 clock value cannot be changed using the front panel keypad To use SNTP in unicast mode SNTP SERVER IP ADDR must be set ...

Страница 177: ...The T60 has one fast exchange exchange 1 and two slow exchanges exchange 2 and 3 The settings menu for the slow EGD exchanges is shown below PATH SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS EGD PROTOCOL SLOW PROD EXCH 1 2 CONFIGURATION FAST PROD EXCH 1 CONFIGURATION EXCH 1 FUNCTION Disable Range Disable Enable MESSAGE EXCH 1 DESTINATION 0 0 0 0 Range standard IP address MESSAGE EXCH 1 DATA RATE 1000 ms ...

Страница 178: ...a data item to be part of an exchange it is only necessary to choose the starting Modbus address of the item That is for items occupying more than one Modbus register for example 32 bit integers and floating point values only the first Modbus address is required The EGD exchange configured with these settings contains the data items up to the first setting that contains a Modbus address with no da...

Страница 179: ...UE 0 Range 0 to 65535 in steps of 1 MESSAGE ADDRESS 2 0 VALUE 0 Range 0 to 65535 in steps of 1 MESSAGE ADDRESS 3 0 VALUE 0 Range 0 to 65535 in steps of 1 MESSAGE ADDRESS 256 0 VALUE 0 Range 0 to 65535 in steps of 1 REAL TIME CLOCK IRIG B SIGNAL TYPE None Range None DC Shift Amplitude Modulated MESSAGE REAL TIME CLOCK EVENTS Disabled Range Disabled Enabled MESSAGE LOCAL TIME OFFSET FROM UTC 0 0 hrs...

Страница 180: ...the pre fault trigger The element waits for the fault trigger as long as the pre fault trigger is asserted but not shorter than 1 second When the fault trigger occurs the fault data is stored and the com plete report is created If the fault trigger does not occur within 1 second after the pre fault trigger drops out the element resets and no record is created The user programmable record contains ...

Страница 181: ... RMS phase angle frequency temperature etc to be stored should the report be created Up to 32 channels can be configured Two reports are configurable to cope with variety of trip conditions and items of interest 5 2 8 OSCILLOGRAPHY a MAIN MENU PATH SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP OSCILLOGRAPHY Oscillography records contain waveforms captured at the sampling rate as well as other relay data at the point of ...

Страница 182: ...as no effect on the fundamental calculations of the device When changes are made to the oscillography settings all existing oscillography records will be CLEARED b DIGITAL CHANNELS PATH SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP OSCILLOGRAPHY DIGITAL CHANNELS A DIGITAL 1 63 CHANNEL setting selects the FlexLogic operand state recorded in an oscillography trace The length of each oscillography trace depends in part on ...

Страница 183: ... will cause the corresponding parameter to be displayed All eight CT VT module channels are stored in the oscillography file The CT VT module channels are named as follows slot_letter terminal_number I or V phase A B or C or 4th input The fourth current input in a bank is called IG and the fourth voltage input in a bank is called VX For example F2 IB desig nates the IB signal on terminal 2 of the ...

Страница 184: ...og DATA LOGGER DATA LOGGER MODE Continuous Range Continuous Trigger MESSAGE DATA LOGGER TRIGGER Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE DATA LOGGER RATE 60000 ms Range 15 to 3600000 ms in steps of 1 MESSAGE DATA LOGGER CHNL 1 Off Range Off any FlexAnalog parameter See Appendix A FlexAnalog Parameters for complete list MESSAGE DATA LOGGER CHNL 2 Off Range Off any FlexAnalog parameter See Appendix A Fle...

Страница 185: ...tables is used to expedite the selection of the parameter on the relay display It can be quite time consuming to scan through the list of parameters via the relay keypad display entering this number via the relay keypad will cause the corresponding parameter to be displayed DATA LOGGER CONFIG This display presents the total amount of time the Data Logger can record the channels not selected to Off...

Страница 186: ...s Each new value of demand becomes available at the end of each pulse Assign a FlexLogic operand to the DEMAND TRIGGER setting to program the input for the new demand interval pulses If no trigger is assigned in the DEMAND TRIGGER setting and the CRNT DEMAND METHOD is Block Interval use cal culating method 2 If a trigger is assigned the maximum allowed time between 2 trigger signals is 60 minutes ...

Страница 187: ...he top left panel moving from top to bottom of each column of the LEDs This test checks for hardware failures that lead to more than one LED being turned off from a single logic point This stage can be interrupted at any time When testing is in progress the LEDs are controlled by the test sequence rather than the protection control and monitor ing features However the LED control mechanism accepts...

Страница 188: ... start stage 2 At this point forward test may be aborted by pressing the pushbutton APPLICATION EXAMPLE 2 Assume one needs to check if any LEDs are burned as well as exercise one LED at a time to check for other failures This is to be performed via user programmable pushbutton 1 After applying the settings in application example 1 hold down the pushbutton as long as necessary to test all LEDs Next...

Страница 189: ...formation on the location of these indexed LEDs The user programmable LED settings select the FlexLogic operands that control the LEDs If the LED 1 TYPE setting is Self Reset the default setting the LED illumination will track the state of the selected LED operand If the LED 1 TYPE set ting is Latched the LED once lit remains so until reset by the faceplate RESET button from a remote device via a ...

Страница 190: ...t alarms To enable the Ethernet switch failure function ensure that the ETHERNET SWITCH FAIL FUNCTION is Enabled in this menu USER PROGRAMMABLE SELF TESTS DIRECT RING BREAK FUNCTION Enabled Range Disabled Enabled Valid for units equipped with Direct Input Output module MESSAGE DIRECT DEVICE OFF FUNCTION Enabled Range Disabled Enabled Valid for units equipped with Direct Input Output module MESSAGE...

Страница 191: ...sable control pushbuttons for security reasons Each control pushbutton asserts its own FlexLogic operand These operands should be configured appropriately to per form the desired function The operand remains asserted as long as the pushbutton is pressed and resets when the push button is released A dropout delay of 100 ms is incorporated to ensure fast pushbutton manipulation will be recognized by...

Страница 192: ...USHBTN 1 RESET Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE PUSHBTN 1 AUTORST Disabled Range Disabled Enabled MESSAGE PUSHBTN 1 AUTORST DELAY 1 0 s Range 0 2 to 600 0 s in steps of 0 1 MESSAGE PUSHBTN 1 REMOTE Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE PUSHBTN 1 LOCAL Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE PUSHBTN 1 DROP OUT TIME 0 00 s Range 0 to 60 00 s in steps of 0 05 MESSAGE PUSHBTN 1 LED CTL Off Range FlexLogi...

Страница 193: ...on and are used to program specific actions If any pushbutton is active the ANY PB ON operand will be asserted Each pushbutton has an associated LED indicator By default this indicator displays the present status of the correspond ing pushbutton on or off However each LED indicator can be assigned to any FlexLogic operand through the PUSHBTN 1 LED CTL setting The pushbuttons can be automatically c...

Страница 194: ...ing selects the characteristic of the pushbutton If set to Disabled the push button is not active and the corresponding FlexLogic operands both On and Off are de asserted If set to Self Reset the control logic is activated by the pulse longer than 100 ms issued when the pushbutton is being physically pressed or virtually pressed via a FlexLogic operand assigned to the PUSHBTN 1 SET setting When in...

Страница 195: ...d remains on has no effect on the pulse duration This setting is required to set the duration of the pushbutton operating pulse PUSHBTN 1 LED CTL This setting assigns the FlexLogic operand serving to drive pushbutton LED If this setting is Off then LED operation is directly linked to PUSHBUTTON 1 ON operand PUSHBTN 1 MESSAGE If pushbutton message is set to High Priority the message programmed in t...

Страница 196: ...Lock SETTING Off 0 Local Lock SETTING Off 0 Set SETTING Off 0 Reset SETTING Enabled Disabled Autoreset Function FLEXLOGIC OPERAND PUSHBUTTON 1 ON FLEXLOGIC OPERAND PUSHBUTTON 1 OFF TIMER 200 ms 0 AND AND AND AND AND TIMER 50 ms 0 TIMER 50 ms 0 SETTING Autoreset Delay TPKP 0 TIMER 200 ms 0 AND AND SETTING Drop Out Timer TRST 0 PUSHBUTTON ON To user programmable pushbuttons logic sheet 2 842024A2 LA...

Страница 197: ...NG any FlexLogic operand PUSHBTN 1 LED CTL AND SETTING Flash Message Time TRST 0 PUSHBUTTON ON LATCHED LATCHED SELF RESET AND From user programmable pushbuttons logic sheet 1 842021A3 FLEXLOGIC OPERAND PUSHBUTTON 1 ON FLEXLOGIC OPERAND PUSHBUTTON 1 OFF SETTING TRST 0 Instantaneous reset LCD MESSAGE ENGAGE MESSAGE SETTINGS XXXXXXXXXX Top Text XXXXXXXXXX On Text The message is temporarily removed if...

Страница 198: ...and ACTUAL VALUES top level menus The sub menus facili tate text entry and Modbus register data pointer options for defining the user display content Once programmed the user definable displays can be viewed in two ways KEYPAD Use the MENU key to select the USER DISPLAYS menu item to access the first user definable display note that only the programmed screens are displayed The screens can be scro...

Страница 199: ...e character is used to mark the start of a data field the length of the data field needs to be accounted for Up to five separate data fields can be entered in a user display the nth tilde refers to the nth item A user display may be entered from the faceplate keypad or the EnerVista UR Setup interface preferred for convenience The following procedure shows how to enter text characters in the top a...

Страница 200: ...and bottom line items are different USER DISPLAY 1 DISP 1 TOP LINE Current X A Shows user defined text with first tilde marker MESSAGE DISP 1 BOTTOM LINE Current Y A Shows user defined text with second tilde marker MESSAGE DISP 1 ITEM 1 6016 Shows decimal form of user selected Modbus register address corresponding to first tilde marker MESSAGE DISP 1 ITEM 2 6357 Shows decimal form of user selected...

Страница 201: ...med and signaled by the following FlexLogic operands 1 DIRECT RING BREAK direct input output ring break This FlexLogic operand indicates that direct output messages sent from a UR series relay are not being received back by the relay 2 DIRECT DEVICE 1 OFF to DIRECT DEVICE 16 OFF direct device offline These FlexLogic operands indicate that direct output messages from at least one direct device are ...

Страница 202: ...nication channels The following application examples illustrate the basic concepts for direct input and output configuration Please refer to the Inputs and outputs section in this chapter for information on configuring FlexLogic operands flags bits to be exchanged Table 5 5 DIRECT INPUT AND OUTPUT DATA RATES MODULE CHANNEL SUPPORTED DATA RATES 74 Channel 1 64 kbps Channel 2 64 kbps 7L Channel 1 64...

Страница 203: ...D 1 DIRECT I O CH1 RING CONFIGURATION Yes DIRECT I O DATA RATE 128 kbps For UR series IED 2 DIRECT OUTPUT DEVICE ID 2 DIRECT I O CH1 RING CONFIGURATION Yes DIRECT I O DATA RATE 128 kbps The message delivery time is about 0 2 of power cycle in both ways at 128 kbps that is from device 1 to device 2 and from device 2 to device 1 Different communications cards can be selected by the user for this bac...

Страница 204: ...oth rings are healthy IED 1 to IED 2 0 2 of power system cycle IED 1 to IED 3 0 4 of power system cycle IED 1 to IED 4 0 2 of power system cycle IED 2 to IED 3 0 2 of power system cycle IED 2 to IED 4 0 4 of power system cycle IED 3 to IED 4 0 2 of power system cycle If one ring is broken say TX2 RX2 the delivery times are as follows IED 1 to IED 2 0 2 of power system cycle IED 1 to IED 3 0 4 of p...

Страница 205: ...UTPUT DEVICE ID 2 DIRECT I O CH1 RING CONFIGURATION Yes DIRECT I O CH2 RING CONFIGURATION Yes For UR series IED 3 DIRECT OUTPUT DEVICE ID 3 DIRECT I O CH1 RING CONFIGURATION Yes DIRECT I O CH2 RING CONFIGURATION Yes In this configuration the following delivery times are expected at 128 kbps IED 1 to IED 2 0 2 of power system cycle IED 1 to IED 3 0 5 of power system cycle IED 2 to IED 3 0 2 of powe...

Страница 206: ...RM 1 2 PATH SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP DIRECT I O CRC ALARM CH1 2 The T60 checks integrity of the incoming direct input and output messages using a 32 bit CRC The CRC alarm function is available for monitoring the communication medium noise by tracking the rate of messages failing the CRC check The monitoring function counts all incoming messages including messages that failed the CRC check A separate...

Страница 207: ...Assuming the best case of only 1 bit error in a failed packet having 1 failed packet for every 63 received is about equal to a BER of 10 4 c UNRETURNED MESSAGES ALARM 1 2 PATH SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP DIRECT I O UNRETURNED MESSAGES ALARM CH1 2 The T60 checks integrity of the direct input and output communication ring by counting unreturned messages In the ring configuration all messages originating ...

Страница 208: ...R OF TERMINALS is 3 three terminal system set the NUMBER OF CHANNELS to 2 For a two terminal system the NUMBER OF CHANNELS can set to 1 or 2 redundant channels LOCAL RELAY ID NUMBER TERMINAL 1 RELAY ID NUMBER and TERMINAL 2 RELAY ID NUMBER In installa tions that use multiplexers or modems it is desirable to ensure that the data used by the relays protecting a given line is from the correct relays ...

Страница 209: ...when at the factory The UNIT NOT PROGRAMMED self test error message is displayed until the relay is put into the Programmed state The RELAY NAME setting allows the user to uniquely identify a relay This name will appear on generated reports This name is also used to identify specific devices which are engaged in automatically sending receiving data over the Ethernet com munications channel using t...

Страница 210: ...consists of the following steps Configure the field units This establishes the point to point connection between a specific port on the relay process bus module and a specific digital core on a specific Brick This is a necessary first step in configuring a process bus relay Configure the AC banks This sets the primary and secondary quantities and connections for currents and voltages AC bank confi...

Страница 211: ... ground CT primary rating must be entered To detect low level ground fault currents the sensitive ground input may be used In this case the sensitive ground CT primary rating must be entered Refer to chapter 3 for more details on CT connections Enter the rated CT primary current values For both 1000 5 and 1000 1 CTs the entry would be 1000 For correct opera tion the CT secondary rating must match ...

Страница 212: ...ECONDARY voltage setting is the voltage across the relay input terminals when nominal voltage is applied to the VT primary For example on a system with a 13 8 kV nominal primary voltage and with a 14400 120 volt VT in a delta connec tion the secondary voltage would be 115 that is 13800 14400 120 For a wye connection the voltage value entered must be the phase to neutral voltage which would be 115 ...

Страница 213: ...sed for frequency metering and tracking for better performance dur ing fault open pole and VT and CT fail conditions The phase reference and frequency tracking AC signals are selected based upon the Source configuration regardless of whether or not a particular signal is actually applied to the relay Phase angle of the reference signal will always display zero degrees and all other phase angles wi...

Страница 214: ...ngs menu The internal design of the ele ment specifies which type of parameter to use and provides a setting for source selection In elements where the parameter may be either fundamental or RMS magnitude such as phase time overcurrent two settings are provided One setting specifies the source the second setting selects between fundamental phasor and RMS AC input actual values The calculated param...

Страница 215: ... The following figure shows the arrangement of sources used to provide the functions required in this application and the CT VT inputs that are used to provide the data INCREASING SLOT POSITION LETTER CT VT MODULE 1 CT VT MODULE 2 CT VT MODULE 3 CTs VTs not applicable 827092A3 CDR SOURCE 1 CURRENT PHASOR PRODUCT SETUP DISPLAY PROPERTIES CURRENT CUT OFF LEVEL PRODUCT SETUP DISPLAY PROPERTIES CURREN...

Страница 216: ...D HV AUX SRC 1 SRC 2 SRC 3 Phase CT M1 F1 F5 None Ground CT M1 None None Phase VT M5 None None Aux VT None None U1 TRANSFORMER GENERAL See page 5 79 MESSAGE WINDING 1 See page 5 81 MESSAGE WINDING 2 See page 5 81 MESSAGE WINDING 3 See page 5 81 827794A1 CDR F 5 F 1 DSP Bank U 1 M 1 M 1 M 5 51BF 1 51BF 2 Source 4 87T 51P UR Relay A V V A W W Var Var Amps Source 1 Source 3 Volts Amps Amps Volts Amps...

Страница 217: ...e CT connections LOAD LOSS AT RATED LOAD This setting should be taken from the transformer nameplate If not available from the nameplate the setting value can be computed as where is the winding rated current and R is the three phase series resistance The setting is used as an input for the calculation of the hottest spot winding tem perature RATED WINDING TEMP RISE This setting defines the windin...

Страница 218: ...ormer nameplate data THERMAL CAPACITY The setting should be available from the transformer nameplate data If not refer to the follow ing calculations For the OA and FA cooling types C 0 06 core and coil assembly in lbs 0 04 tank and fittings in lbs 1 33 gallons of oil Wh C or C 0 0272 core and coil assembly in kg 0 01814 tank and fittings in kg 5 034 L of oil Wh C For the Non directed FOA FOW non ...

Страница 219: ...owing example of a delta wye Δ Y connected power transformer with the following data The abbreviated nomenclature for applicable relay settings is as follows Rotation SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP POWER SYSTEM PHASE ROTATION wtotal SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP TRANSFORMER GENERAL NUMBER OF WINDINGS Compensation SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP TRANSFORMER GENERAL PHASE COMPENSATION Source w SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP TRANSFORME...

Страница 220: ...iagram on the nameplate with the winding terminals clearly labeled This standard specifically states that the phase relationships are established for a condi tion where the source phase sequence of 1 2 3 is connected to transformer windings labeled 1 2 and 3 respectively IEC standard 60076 1 1993 states that the terminal markings of the three phases follow national practice The phase rela tionship...

Страница 221: ...re not recommended All information presented in this manual is based on connecting the relay phase A B and C terminals to the power system phases A B and C respectively The transformer types and phase relationships presented are for a system phase sequence of ABC in accordance with the standards for power transformers Users with a system phase sequence of ACB must determine the transformer type fo...

Страница 222: ... the lowest CT margin In our example the reference winding is chosen as follows 1 Calculate the rated current for windings 1 and 2 EQ 5 11 2 With these rated currents calculate the CT margin for windings 1 and 2 EQ 5 12 3 Since the reference winding wref is winding 2 The reference winding is shown in ACTUAL VALUES METERING TRANSFORMER DIFFERENTIAL AND RESTRAINT REFERENCE WINDING The unit for calcu...

Страница 223: ... allow zero sequence current flow in that winding and therefore it is from these windings that zero sequence removal is necessary The T60 performs this phase angle compensation and zero sequence removal automatically based on the settings entered for the transformer All CTs are connected Wye polarity markings pointing away from the transformer All currents are phase and zero sequence compensated i...

Страница 224: ... 1 3 IA w 1 3 IB w IB p w 2 3 IA w 1 3 IB w 1 3 IC w IC p w 2 3 IB w 1 3 IA w 1 3 IC w IA p w 1 3 IB w 1 3 IC w IB p w 1 3 IC w 1 3 IA w IC p w 1 3 IA w 1 3 IB w IA p w 1 3 IB w 1 3 IC w IB p w 1 3 IC w 1 3 IA w IC p w 1 3 IA w 1 3 IB w IA p w IB w IB p w IC w IC p w IA w IA p w 2 3 IB w 1 3 IA w 1 3 IC w IB p w 2 3 IC w 1 3 IA w 1 3 IB w IC p w 2 3 IA w 1 3 IB w 1 3 IC w IA p w 1 3 IB w 1 3 IA w ...

Страница 225: ...ne Grounding w Within zone IA p w IC w IB p w IA w IC p w IB w IA p w 2 3 IC w 1 3 IA w 1 3 IB w IB p w 2 3 IA w 1 3 IB w 1 3 IC w IC p w 2 3 IB w 1 3 IA w 1 3 IC w IA p w 1 3 IC w 1 3 IB w IB p w 1 3 IA w 1 3 IC w IC p w 1 3 IB w 1 3 IA w IA p w 1 3 IC w 1 3 IB w IB p w 1 3 IA w 1 3 IC w IC p w 1 3 IB w 1 3 IA w IA p w IB w IB p w IC w IC p w IA w IA p w 2 3 IB w 1 3 IA w 1 3 IC w IB p w 2 3 IC w...

Страница 226: ...his approach is preferred because it provides increased sensitivity as the current from each individual set of CTs partici pates directly in the calculation of CT ratio mismatch phase compensation zero sequence removal if required and the differential restraint current The concept used in this approach is to consider that each set of CTs connected to winding 1 represents a connection to an individ...

Страница 227: ...et tings menu WINDING 1 SOURCE WDG 1X WINDING 2 SOURCE WDG 1Y WINDING 3 SOURCE WDG 2 SETUP METHOD B ALTERNATE This approach adds the current from each phase of the CT1 and CT2 together to represent the total winding 1 current The procedure is shown below 1 Enter the settings for each set of CTs in the SYSTEM SETUP AC INPUTS CURRENT BANK settings menu as shown for Method A above 2 Configure Source ...

Страница 228: ...h of the year if a directly measured device output is not available see monthly settings below TOP OIL TEMPERATURE Select RTD DCmA or remote RTD input for direct measurement of top oil temperature If an RTD or DCmA input is not available select Computed The following menu will be available when AMBIENT TEMPERATURE is Monthly Average PATH SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP TRANSFORMER THERMAL INPUTS AMBIENT TEM...

Страница 229: ...E Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE BREAKER 1 ΦA 3P CLSD Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE BREAKER 1 ΦA 3P OPND Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE BREAKER 1 ΦB CLOSED Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE BREAKER 1 ΦB OPENED Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE BREAKER 1 ΦC CLOSED Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE BREAKER 1 ΦC OPENED Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE BREAKER 1 Toperate 0 070...

Страница 230: ...and used to track the breaker open or closed position If the mode is selected as 1 Pole the input mentioned above is used to track phase A and the BREAKER 1 ΦB and BREAKER 1 ΦC settings select operands to track phases B and C respectively BREAKER 1 ΦA 3P OPND This setting selects an operand usually a contact input that should be a normally closed 52 b status input to create a logic 1 when the brea...

Страница 231: ...sabled BREAKER 1 FUNCTION SETTING Off 0 BREAKER 1 BLOCK OPEN FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS TRIP PHASE A TRIP PHASE B TRIP PHASE C TRIP 3 POLE SETTING Off 0 BREAKER 1 OPEN SETTING Enabled BREAKER 1 PUSHBUTTON CONTROL USER 2 OFF ON To close BRK1 Name SETTING Off 0 BREAKER 1 CLOSE FLEXLOGIC OPERAND AR CLOSE BKR 1 SETTING Off 0 BREAKER 1 BLOCK CLOSE SETTING MANUAL CLOSE RECAL1 TIME 0 FLEXLOGIC OPERAND BREAKER 1 ...

Страница 232: ... 1 FA OPEN BREAKER 1 INTERM FA FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS BREAKER 1 ANY P OPEN BREAKER 1 1P OPEN BREAKER 1 OOS SETTING 3 Pole 1 Pole BREAKER 1 MODE SETTING Off BREAKER 1 EXT ALARM SETTING Off BREAKER 1 OUT OF SV AND OR OR SETTING BREAKER 1 ALARM DELAY 0 AND AND AND AND AND AND OR SETTING Off BREAKER 1 ΦA 3P CLSD Off BREAKER 1 ΦA 3P OPND SETTING AND AND SETTING BREAKER 1 Toperate 0 AND AND AND AND AND AND ...

Страница 233: ...to disconnect switch 1 SWITCH 1 MODE This setting selects 3 Pole mode where disconnect switch poles have a single common auxiliary switch or 1 Pole mode where each disconnect switch pole has its own auxiliary switch SWITCH 1 SWITCH 1 FUNCTION Disabled Range Disabled Enabled MESSAGE SWITCH 1 NAME SW 1 Range up to 6 alphanumeric characters MESSAGE SWITCH 1 MODE 3 Pole Range 3 Pole 1 Pole MESSAGE SWI...

Страница 234: ...put to create a logic 1 when the disconnect switch is open If a separate 89 b contact input is not available then an inverted 89 a status signal can be used SWITCH 1 ΦB CLOSED If the mode is selected as three pole this setting has no function If the mode is selected as single pole this input is used to track the disconnect switch phase B closed position as above for phase A SWITCH 1 ΦB OPENED If t...

Страница 235: ...OUBLE FLEXLOGIC OPERAND SWITCH 1 BAD STATUS FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS SWITCH FA BAD ST 1 SWITCH FA CLSD 1 SWITCH FA OPEN 1 SWITCH FA 1 INTERM SETTING 3 Pole 1 Pole SWITCH 1 MODE AND OR OR SETTING SWITCH 1 ALARM DELAY 0 AND AND AND AND AND AND OR SETTING Off SWTCH 1 ΦA 3P CLSD Off SWTCH 1 ΦA 3P OPND SETTING AND AND SETTING SWITCH 1 Toperate 0 AND AND AND AND AND OR SETTING Off SWITCH 1 ΦB CLSD Off SWITCH ...

Страница 236: ...iple of pickup of 1 that is 0 98 pu and 1 03 pu It is recommended to set the two times to a similar value otherwise the lin ear approximation may result in undesired behavior for the operating quantity that is close to 1 00 pu FLEXCURVE A FLEXCURVE A TIME AT 0 00 xPKP 0 ms Range 0 to 65535 ms in steps of 1 Table 5 8 FLEXCURVE TABLE RESET TIME MS RESET TIME MS OPERATE TIME MS OPERATE TIME MS OPERAT...

Страница 237: ...ly at higher currents and where upstream and downstream pro tective devices have different operating characteristics The recloser curve configuration window shown below appears when the Initialize From EnerVista UR Setup setting is set to Recloser Curve and the Initialize FlexCurve button is clicked Figure 5 27 RECLOSER CURVE INITIALIZATION The multiplier and adder settings only affect the curve p...

Страница 238: ...0 ms see below Figure 5 28 COMPOSITE RECLOSER CURVE WITH HCT DISABLED With the HCT feature enabled the operating time reduces to 30 ms for pickup multiples exceeding 8 times pickup Figure 5 29 COMPOSITE RECLOSER CURVE WITH HCT ENABLED Configuring a composite curve with an increase in operating time at increased pickup multiples is not allowed If this is attempted the EnerVista UR Setup software ge...

Страница 239: ...SER CURVES GE113 GE120 GE138 AND GE142 GE104 1 1 2 1 5 2 2 5 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 15 20 0 01 0 02 0 05 0 1 0 2 0 5 1 2 CURRENT multiple of pickup TIME sec GE101 GE102 GE103 GE106 GE105 842723A1 CDR 1 1 2 1 5 2 2 5 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 15 20 0 05 0 1 0 2 0 5 1 2 5 10 20 50 CURRENT multiple of pickup TIME sec GE113 GE142 GE138 GE120 842725A1 CDR ...

Страница 240: ... AND GE201 Figure 5 33 RECLOSER CURVES GE131 GE141 GE152 AND GE200 1 1 2 1 5 2 2 5 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 15 20 0 5 1 2 5 10 20 50 CURRENT multiple of pickup TIME sec GE134 GE151 GE140 GE137 GE201 842730A1 CDR 1 1 2 1 5 2 2 5 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 15 20 2 5 10 20 50 CURRENT multiple of pickup TIME sec GE131 GE200 GE152 GE141 842728A1 CDR ...

Страница 241: ...ES GE116 GE117 GE118 GE132 GE136 AND GE139 842729A1 CDR 1 1 2 1 5 2 2 5 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 15 20 0 01 0 02 0 05 0 1 0 2 0 5 1 2 5 10 20 50 CURRENT multiple of pickup TIME sec GE133 GE163 GE162 GE161 GE165 GE164 842726A1 CDR 1 1 2 1 5 2 2 5 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 15 20 0 01 0 02 0 05 0 1 0 2 0 5 1 2 5 10 20 CURRENT multiple of pickup TIME sec GE116 GE132 GE118 GE117 GE139 GE136 ...

Страница 242: ...2 Figure 5 37 RECLOSER CURVES GE119 GE135 AND GE202 842724A1 CDR 1 1 2 1 5 2 2 5 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 15 20 0 01 0 02 0 05 0 1 0 2 0 5 1 2 5 10 20 CURRENT multiple of pickup TIME sec GE121 GE114 GE112 GE122 GE107 GE115 GE111 842727A1 CDR 1 1 2 1 5 2 2 5 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 15 20 0 2 0 5 1 2 5 10 20 50 CURRENT multiple of pickup TIME sec GE119 GE202 GE135 ...

Страница 243: ...ing recording and content for transmission on each of the supported ports The reporting ports menus allow specifying the content and rate of reporting on each of the supported ports Precise IRIG B input is vital for correct synchrophasor measurement and reporting A DC level shift IRIG B receiver must be used for the phasor measurement unit to output proper synchrophasor values The PMU settings are...

Страница 244: ...tual voltage A B C and auxiliary and cur rent A B C and ground channels of the source as well as symmetrical components 0 1 and 2 of both voltages and currents When configuring communication and recording features of the PMU the user could select from the above superset the content to be sent out or recorded PMU 1 POST FILTER This setting specifies amount of post filtering applied to raw synchroph...

Страница 245: ...he central locations to perform the compensation of sequence voltages 3 This setting applies to PMU data only The T60 calculates symmetrical voltages independently for protection and control purposes without applying this correction 4 When connected to line to line voltages the PMU calculates symmetrical voltages with the reference to the AG voltage and not to the physically connected AB voltage s...

Страница 246: ... PHS 14 PMU 1 V1 Range available synchrophasor values MESSAGE PMU1 PORT PHS 14 NM GE UR PMU1 V1 Range 16 alphanumeric characters MESSAGE PMU1 PORT A CH 1 Off Range available FlexAnalog values MESSAGE PMU1 PORT A CH 1 NM AnalogChannel1 Range 16 alphanumeric characters MESSAGE PMU1 PORT A CH 8 Off Range available FlexAnalog values MESSAGE PMU1 PORT A CH 8 NM AnalogChannel8 Range 16 alphanumeric char...

Страница 247: ...U1 PORT D CH 1 to PMU1 PORT D CH 16 These settings specify any digital flag measured by the relay to be included as a user selectable digital channel of the data frame Up to sixteen digital channels can be configured to send any FlexLogic operand from the relay The configured digital flags are sampled concurrently with the synchro phasor instant The values are mapped into a two byte integer number...

Страница 248: ...tion via targets The five triggers drive the STAT bits of the data frame to inform the destination of the synchrophasor data regarding the cause of trigger The following convention is adopted to drive bits 11 3 2 1 and 0 of the STAT word Figure 5 38 STAT BITS LOGIC f USER TRIGGERING PATH SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP PHASOR MEASUREMENT PMU 1 TRIGGERING PMU 1 USER TRIGGER The user trigger allows customized...

Страница 249: ...ion returned to nor mal This setting is of particular importance when using the recorder in the forced mode recording as long as the trig gering condition is asserted Figure 5 39 FREQUENCY TRIGGER SCHEME LOGIC PMU 1 FREQUENCY TRIGGER PMU 1 FREQ TRIGGER FUNCTION Disabled Range Enabled Disabled MESSAGE PMU 1 FREQ TRIGGER LOW FREQ 49 00 Hz Range 20 00 to 70 00 Hz in steps of 0 01 MESSAGE PMU 1 FREQ T...

Страница 250: ...setting specifies the high threshold for the abnormal voltage trigger in per unit of the PMU source 1 pu is a nominal voltage value defined as the nominal secondary voltage times VT ratio The comparator applies a 3 hysteresis PMU 1 VOLT TRIGGER PKP TIME This setting could be used to filter out spurious conditions and avoid unnecessary triggering of the recorder PMU 1 VOLT TRIGGER DPO TIME This set...

Страница 251: ...g as the trig gering condition is asserted PMU 1 CURRENT TRIGGER PMU 1 CURR TRIGGER FUNCTION Disabled Range Enabled Disabled MESSAGE PMU 1 CURR TRIGGER PICKUP 1 800 pu Range 0 100 to 30 000 pu in steps of 0 001 MESSAGE PMU 1 CURR TRIGGER PKP TIME 0 10 s Range 0 00 to 600 00 s in steps of 0 01 MESSAGE PMU 1 CURR TRIGGER DPO TIME 1 00 s Range 0 00 to 600 00 s in steps of 0 01 MESSAGE PMU 1 CURR TRIG...

Страница 252: ...T ratio and the nominal primary current For the three phase power 1 pu is three times that for a sin gle phase power The comparator applies a 3 hysteresis PMU 1 POWER TRIGGER PMU 1 POWER TRIGGER FUNCTION Disabled Range Enabled Disabled MESSAGE PMU 1 POWER TRIGGER ACTIVE 1 250 pu Range 0 250 to 3 000 pu in steps of 0 001 MESSAGE PMU 1 POWER TRIGGER REACTIVE 1 250 pu Range 0 250 to 3 000 pu in steps...

Страница 253: ...ondition is asserted Figure 5 42 POWER TRIGGER SCHEME LOGIC 847003A1 CDR SETTINGS PMU 1 POWER TRIGGER FUNCTION Enabled 1 PMU 1 PWR TRIG BLK Off 0 AND SETTINGS PMU 1 POWER TRIGGER ACTIVE RUN SETTINGS PMU 1 POWER TRIGGER PKP TIME PMU 1 POWER TRIGGER DPO TIME tPKP tDPO FLEXLOGIC OPERAND PMU 1 POWER TRIGGER FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS PMU 1 FREQ TRIGGER PMU 1 VOLT TRIGGER PMU 1 CURR TRIGGER PMU 1 ROCOF TRIGGER...

Страница 254: ... in the forced mode recording as long as the trig gering condition is asserted Figure 5 43 RATE OF CHANGE OF FREQUENCY TRIGGER SCHEME LOGIC PMU 1 df dt TRIGGER PMU 1 df dt TRIGGER FUNCTION Disabled Range Enabled Disabled MESSAGE PMU 1 df dt TRIGGER RAISE 0 25 Hz s Range 0 10 to 15 00 Hz s in steps of 0 01 MESSAGE PMU 1 df dt TRIGGER FALL 0 25 Hz s Range 0 10 to 15 00 Hz s in steps of 0 01 MESSAGE ...

Страница 255: ...TRIGGER POSITION 10 Range 1 to 50 in steps of 1 MESSAGE PMU 1 REC PHS 1 PMU 1 V1 Range available synchrophasor values MESSAGE PMU 1 REC PHS 1 NM GE UR PMU V1 Range 16 character ASCII string MESSAGE PMU 1 REC PHS 14 Off Range available synchrophasor values MESSAGE PMU 1 REC PHS 14 NM GE UR PMU PHS 14 Range 16 character ASCII string MESSAGE PMU 1 REC A CH 1 Off Range available FlexAnalog values MESS...

Страница 256: ...available memory storage If set to Automatic Overwrite the last record is erased to facilitate new recording when triggered If set to Protected the recorder stops creating new records when the entire memory is used up by the old un cleared records Refer to chapter 7 for more information on clearing PMU records The following set of figures illustrate the concept of memory management via the PMU 1 T...

Страница 257: ...nt PMU 1 REC A CH 1 NM to PMU 1 REC A CH 8 NM These settings allow for custom naming of the analog channels Sixteen character ASCII strings are allowed as in the CHNAM field of the configuration frame PMU 1 REC D CH 1 to PMU 1 REC D CH 16 These settings specify any digital flag measured by the relay to be included as a user selectable digital channel in the record Up to digital analog channels can...

Страница 258: ...TWORK PDC CONTROL The synchrophasor standard allows for user defined controls originating at the PDC to be executed on the PMU The control is accomplished via an extended command frame The relay decodes the first word of the extended field EXTFRAME to drive 16 dedicated FlexLogic operands PDC NETWORK CNTRL 1 from the least significant bit to PDC NETWORK CNTRL 16 from the most significant bit Other...

Страница 259: ...contact output The state of the contact input can be displayed locally or viewed remotely via the communications facilities provided If a simple scheme where a contact input is used to block an element is desired this selection is made when programming the ele ment This capability also applies to the other features that set flags elements virtual inputs remote inputs schemes and human operators If...

Страница 260: ...S 1 ON IF Contact Input On Cont Ip On Voltage is presently applied to the input external contact closed Off Cont Ip Off Voltage is presently not applied to the input external contact open Contact Output type Form A contact only Current On Cont Op 1 Ion Current is flowing through the contact Voltage On Cont Op 1 VOn Voltage exists across the contact Voltage Off Cont Op 1 VOff Voltage does not exist...

Страница 261: ...1 FLSHOVR PKP A BKR 1 FLSHOVR PKP B BKR 1 FLSHOVR PKP C BKR 1 FLSHOVR PKP BKR 1 FLSHOVR OP A BKR 1 FLSHOVR OP B BKR 1 FLSHOVR OP C BKR 1 FLSHOVR OP BKR 1 FLSHOVR DPO A BKR 1 FLSHOVR DPO B BKR 1 FLSHOVR DPO C BKR 1 FLSHOVR DPO Breaker 1 flashover element phase A has picked up Breaker 1 flashover element phase B has picked up Breaker 1 flashover element phase C has picked up Breaker 1 flashover elem...

Страница 262: ...comparison value Digital counter 1 output is less than comparison value Counter 2 to 8 Same set of operands as shown for Counter 1 ELEMENT Digital elements Dig Element 1 PKP Dig Element 1 OP Dig Element 1 DPO Digital Element 1 is picked up Digital Element 1 is operated Digital Element 1 is dropped out Dig Element 2 to 48 Same set of operands as shown for Dig Element 1 ELEMENT FlexElements FxE 1 PK...

Страница 263: ...NT Phase distance PH DIST Z1 PKP PH DIST Z1 OP PH DIST Z1 OP AB PH DIST Z1 OP BC PH DIST Z1 OP CA PH DIST Z1 PKP AB PH DIST Z1 PKP BC PH DIST Z1 PKP CA PH DIST Z1 SUPN IAB PH DIST Z1 SUPN IBC PH DIST Z1 SUPN ICA PH DIST Z1 DPO AB PH DIST Z1 DPO BC PH DIST Z1 DPO CA Phase distance zone 1 has picked up Phase distance zone 1 has operated Phase distance zone 1 phase AB has operated Phase distance zone...

Страница 264: ...phase undervoltage 1 has operated Phase B of phase undervoltage 1 has operated Phase C of phase undervoltage 1 has operated Phase A of phase undervoltage 1 has dropped out Phase B of phase undervoltage 1 has dropped out Phase C of phase undervoltage 1 has dropped out PHASE UV2 to 3 Same set of operands as shown for PHASE UV1 ELEMENT Synchrophasor phasor measurement unit PMU PMU 1 CURR TRIGGER PMU ...

Страница 265: ...ve Setting group 4 is active Setting group 5 is active Setting group 6 is active ELEMENT Disturbance detector SRC1 50DD OP SRC2 50DD OP SRC3 50DD OP SRC4 50DD OP SRC5 50DD OP SRC6 50DD OP Source 1 disturbance detector has operated Source 2 disturbance detector has operated Source 3 disturbance detector has operated Source 4 disturbance detector has operated Source 5 disturbance detector has operat...

Страница 266: ...r hertz element 1 has operated The volts per hertz element 1 has dropped out VOLT PER HERTZ 2 Same set of operands as VOLT PER HERTZ 1 ELEMENT Transformer aging factor XFMR AGING FCTR PKP XFMR AGING FCTR OP XFMR AGING FCTR DPO The transformer aging factor element has picked up The transformer aging factor element has operated The transformer aging factor element has dropped out ELEMENT Transformer...

Страница 267: ...REMOTE INPUT 1 On REMOTE INPUT 2 On REMOTE INPUT 3 On REMOTE INPUT 32 On Flag is set logic 1 Flag is set logic 1 Flag is set logic 1 Flag is set logic 1 INPUTS OUTPUTS Virtual inputs Virt Ip 1 On Virt Ip 2 On Virt Ip 3 On Virt Ip 64 On Flag is set logic 1 Flag is set logic 1 Flag is set logic 1 Flag is set logic 1 INPUTS OUTPUTS Virtual outputs Virt Op 1 On Virt Op 2 On Virt Op 3 On Virt Op 96 On ...

Страница 268: ...DIRECT RING BREAK EQUIPMENT MISMATCH ETHERNET SWITCH FAIL FLEXLOGIC ERR TOKEN IRIG B FAILURE LATCHING OUT ERROR MAINTENANCE ALERT PORT 1 OFFLINE PORT 2 OFFLINE PORT 3 OFFLINE PORT 4 OFFLINE PORT 5 OFFLINE PORT 6 OFFLINE PRI ETHERNET FAIL PROCESS BUS FAILURE REMOTE DEVICE OFF RRTD COMM FAIL SEC ETHERNET FAIL SNTP FAILURE SYSTEM EXCEPTION TEMP MONITOR UNIT NOT PROGRAMMED Any of the major self test e...

Страница 269: ...hat generates a pulse in response to an edge on the input The output from a one shot is True positive for only one pass through the FlexLogic equation There is a maximum of 64 one shots NEGATIVE ONE SHOT One shot that responds to a negative going edge DUAL ONE SHOT One shot that responds to both the positive and negative going edges Logic gate NOT Logical NOT Operates on the previous parameter OR ...

Страница 270: ... can only be properly assigned once Figure 5 48 EXAMPLE LOGIC SCHEME 1 Inspect the example logic diagram to determine if the required logic can be implemented with the FlexLogic opera tors If this is not possible the logic must be altered until this condition is satisfied Once this is done count the inputs to each gate to verify that the number of inputs does not exceed the FlexLogic limits which ...

Страница 271: ...eter at a time until the required logic is complete It is generally easier to start at the output end of the equation and work back towards the input as shown in the following steps It is also recommended to list operator inputs from bottom to top For demonstration the final output will be arbitrarily identified as parameter 99 and each preceding parameter decremented by one in turn Until accustom...

Страница 272: ...sume for this example the state is to be ON for a closed contact The operand is therefore Cont Ip H1c On 95 The last step in the procedure is to specify the upper input to the AND gate the operated state of digital element 2 This operand is DIG ELEM 2 OP Writing the parameters in numerical order can now form the equation for virtual output 3 95 DIG ELEM 2 OP 96 Cont Ip H1c On 97 NOT 98 AND 2 99 Vi...

Страница 273: ...he lower input to the XOR is operand DIG ELEM 1 PKP 88 The upper input to the XOR is operand Virt Ip 1 On 87 The input just below the upper input to OR 1 is operand Virt Op 2 On 86 The upper input to OR 1 is operand Virt Op 1 On 85 The last parameter is used to set the latch and is operand Virt Op 4 On The equation for virtual output 4 is 85 Virt Op 4 On 86 Virt Op 1 On 87 Virt Op 2 On 88 Virt Ip ...

Страница 274: ...er 1 as arranged in the order shown below DIG ELEM 2 OP Cont Ip H1c On NOT AND 2 Virt Op 3 Virt Op 4 On Virt Op 1 On Virt Op 2 On Virt Ip 1 On DIG ELEM 1 PKP XOR 2 Virt Op 3 On OR 4 LATCH S R Virt Op 3 On TIMER 1 Cont Ip H1c On OR 3 TIMER 2 Virt Op 4 END In the expression above the virtual output 4 input to the four input OR is listed before it is created This is typical of a form of feedback in t...

Страница 275: ...ill never be set to 1 The key may be used when editing FlexLogic equations from the keypad to quickly scan through the major parameter types 5 5 6 FLEXLOGIC TIMERS PATH SETTINGS FLEXLOGIC FLEXLOGIC TIMERS FLEXLOGIC TIMER 1 32 There are 32 identical FlexLogic timers available These timers can be used as operators for FlexLogic equations TIMER 1 TYPE This setting is used to select the time measuring...

Страница 276: ...abled Enabled MESSAGE FLEXELEMENT 1 NAME FxE1 Range up to 6 alphanumeric characters MESSAGE FLEXELEMENT 1 IN Off Range Off any analog actual value parameter MESSAGE FLEXELEMENT 1 IN Off Range Off any analog actual value parameter MESSAGE FLEXELEMENT 1 INPUT MODE Signed Range Signed Absolute MESSAGE FLEXELEMENT 1 COMP MODE Level Range Level Delta MESSAGE FLEXELEMENT 1 DIRECTION Over Range Over Unde...

Страница 277: ...le applications for the Absolute setting include monitoring the angular difference between two phasors with a symmetrical limit angle in both directions monitoring power regardless of its direction or monitoring a trend regardless of whether the signal increases of decreases The element responds directly to its operating signal as defined by the FLEXELEMENT 1 IN FLEXELEMENT 1 IN and FLEX ELEMENT 1...

Страница 278: ... 1 PKP FLEXELEMENT DIRECTION Over PICKUP HYSTERESIS of PICKUP FlexElement 1 OpSig FLEXELEMENT 1 PKP FLEXELEMENT DIRECTION Under PICKUP HYSTERESIS of PICKUP 842705A1 CDR 842706A2 CDR FlexElement 1 OpSig FLEXELEMENT 1 PKP FLEXELEMENT DIRECTION Over FLEXELEMENT INPUT MODE Signed FlexElement 1 OpSig FLEXELEMENT 1 PKP FLEXELEMENT DIRECTION Over FLEXELEMENT INPUT MODE Absolute FlexElement 1 OpSig FLEXEL...

Страница 279: ...etting is applicable only if FLEXELEMENT 1 COMP MODE is set to Delta This FLEXELEMENT 1 PKP DELAY setting specifies the pickup delay of the element The FLEXELEMENT 1 RST DELAY setting specifies the reset delay of the element Table 5 14 FLEXELEMENT BASE UNITS DCmA BASE maximum value of the DCMA INPUT MAX setting for the two transducers configured under the IN and IN inputs FREQUENCY fBASE 1 Hz PHAS...

Страница 280: ...rted the specified FlexLogic operand resets Latch 1 Figure 5 58 NON VOLATILE LATCH OPERATION TABLE N 1 to 16 AND LOGIC LATCH 1 LATCH 1 FUNCTION Disabled Range Disabled Enabled MESSAGE LATCH 1 TYPE Reset Dominant Range Reset Dominant Set Dominant MESSAGE LATCH 1 SET Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE LATCH 1 RESET Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE LATCH 1 TARGET Self reset Range Self reset Latch...

Страница 281: ...he SETTING GROUPS menu see the Control elements section later in this chapter See also the Introduction to elements section at the beginning of this chap ter 5 6 2 SETTING GROUP PATH SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1 6 Each of the six setting group menus is identical Setting group 1 the default active group automatically becomes active if no other group is active see the Control elements s...

Страница 282: ...tem may experience power swing conditions rotating the voltage and current phasors slowly while the memory voltage is static as frozen at the beginning of the fault Keeping the memory in effect for too long may eventually lead to incorrect operation of the distance functions The distance zones can be forced to become self polarized through the FORCE SELF POLAR setting Any user selected con dition ...

Страница 283: ...Dy7 Dy9 Dy11 Yd1 Yd3 Yd5 Yd7 Yd9 Yd11 MESSAGE PHS DIST Z1 XFMR CUR CONNECTION None Range None Dy1 Dy3 Dy5 Dy7 Dy9 Dy11 Yd1 Yd3 Yd5 Yd7 Yd9 Yd11 MESSAGE PHS DIST Z1 REACH 2 00 ohms Range 0 02 to 500 00 ohms in steps of 0 01 MESSAGE PHS DIST Z1 RCA 85 Range 30 to 90 in steps of 1 MESSAGE PHS DIST Z1 REV REACH 2 00 ohms Range 0 02 to 500 00 ohms in steps of 0 01 MESSAGE PHS DIST Z1 REV REACH RCA 85 R...

Страница 284: ...UP 1 6 DISTANCE The common distance settings described earlier must be properly chosen for correct operation of the phase distance ele ments Additional details may be found in chapter 8 Theory of operation Although all zones can be used as either instantaneous elements pickup PKP and dropout DPO FlexLogic operands or time delayed elements operate OP FlexLogic operands only zone 1 is intended for t...

Страница 285: ...is setting selects the shape of the phase distance function between the mho and quadrilat eral characteristics The selection is available on a per zone basis The two characteristics and their possible varia tions are shown in the following figures Figure 5 60 DIRECTIONAL MHO DISTANCE CHARACTERISTIC Figure 5 61 NON DIRECTIONAL MHO DISTANCE CHARACTERISTIC 837720A1 CDR X R R E A C H RCA DIR RCA DIR C...

Страница 286: ...ISTIC Figure 5 63 NON DIRECTIONAL QUADRILATERAL PHASE DISTANCE CHARACTERISTIC 837721A1 CDR X R RE AC H RCA DIR RCA DIR COMP LIMIT DIR COMP LIMIT COMP LIMIT COMP LIMIT RGT BLD RCA LFT BLD RCA RGT BLD LFT BLD 837803A1 CDR X R R E AC H RCA COMP LIMIT COMP LIMIT RGT BLD RCA LFT BLD RCA RGT BLD LFT BLD R E V R E AC H REV REACH RCA COMP LIMIT COMP LIMIT ...

Страница 287: ...IT 60o X R R E A C H RCA 80o COMP LIMIT 60o DIR RCA 80o DIR COMP LIMIT 60o X R REACH RCA 90o COMP LIMIT 90o DIR RCA 45o DIR COMP LIMIT 90o 837723A1 CDR X R R E A C H RCA 80o COMP LIMIT 90o DIR RCA 80o DIR COMP LIMIT 90o RGT BLD RCA 80o LFT BLD RCA 80o X R X R X R R E A C H RCA 80o COMP LIMIT 90o DIR RCA 80o DIR COMP LIMIT 60o RGT BLD RCA 80o LFT BLD RCA 80o REACH RCA 90o COMP LIMIT 90o DIR RCA 45o...

Страница 288: ...the Z3 setting shall be set to None See the Theory of operation chapter for more details and the Application of settings chapter for information on calcu lating distance reach settings in applications involving power transformers Figure 5 66 APPLICATIONS OF THE PH DIST XFMR VOL CUR CONNECTION SETTINGS PHS DIST Z1 REACH This setting defines the zone reach for the forward and reverse applications In...

Страница 289: ...xis of the impedance plane see the Quadrilateral distance characteristic figures The angular position of the blinder is adjustable with the use of the PHS DIST Z1 QUAD RGT BLD RCA setting This setting applies only to the quadrilateral characteristic and should be set giving consideration to the maximum load current and required resistive coverage PHS DIST Z1 QUAD RGT BLD RCA This setting defines t...

Страница 290: ...her or migrates from the initial zone to zone 2 Desired zones in the trip output function should be assigned to accomplish this functionality D60 L60 and L90 only Other UR series models apply regular current seal in for zone 1 OR OR OR OR AND AND AND AND AND AND 837017A8 CDR FLEXLOGIC OPERAND PH DIST Z1 PKP AB PH DIST Z1 SUPN IAB PH DIST Z1 SUPN IBC PH DIST Z1 SUPN ICA OPEN POLE OP FLEXLOGIC OPERA...

Страница 291: ...1 Wye VTs Delta VTs SETTINGS PH DIST Z1 DIR RUN A B ELEMENT RUN B C ELEMENT RUN C A ELEMENT PH DIST Z1 SHAPE PH DIST Z1 XFMR VOL CONNECTION PH DIST Z1 XFMR CUR CONNECTION PH DIST Z1 REACH PH DIST Z1 RCA PH DIST Z1 REV REACH PH DIST Z1 REV REACH RCA PH DIST Z1 COMP LIMIT PH DIST Z1 QUAD RGT BLD PH DIST Z1 QUAD RGT BLD RCA PH DIST Z1 QUAD LFT BLD PH DIST Z1 QUAD LFT BLD RCA PH DIST Z1 VOLT LEVEL TIM...

Страница 292: ... MESSAGE GND DIST Z1 RCA 85 Range 30 to 90 in steps of 1 MESSAGE GND DIST Z1 REV REACH 2 00 Ω Range 0 02 to 500 00 ohms in steps of 0 01 MESSAGE GND DIST Z1 REV REACH RCA 85 Range 30 to 90 in steps of 1 MESSAGE GND DIST Z1 POL CURRENT Zero seq Range Zero seq Neg seq MESSAGE GND DIST Z1 NON HOMOGEN ANG 0 0 Range 40 0 to 40 0 in steps of 0 1 MESSAGE GND DIST Z1 COMP LIMIT 90 Range 30 to 90 in steps ...

Страница 293: ... zone is configured individually through its own setting menu All of the settings can be independently modified for each of the zones except 1 The SIGNAL SOURCE setting common for both phase and ground elements for all zones as entered under the SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1 6 DISTANCE menu 2 The MEMORY DURATION setting common for both phase and ground elements for all zones as entered...

Страница 294: ...edance required for zero sequence compensation of the ground distance elements The entered value is the zero sequence impedance angle minus the positive sequence impedance angle This setting is available on a per zone basis enabling precise values for tapped non homologous and series compensated lines GND DIST Z1 ZOM Z1 MAG The ground distance elements can be programmed to apply compensation for t...

Страница 295: ...nce quantities Refer to chapters 8 for additional information GND DIST Z1 REV REACH This setting defines the reverse reach of the zone set to non directional GND DIST Z1 DIR setting The value must be entered in secondary ohms This setting does not apply when the zone direction is set to Forward or Reverse GND DIST Z1 REV REACH RCA This setting defines the angle of the reverse reach impedance if th...

Страница 296: ... due to VT fuse failure Settings less than 0 2 pu are not recommended and should be applied with caution To enhance ground distance security against spuri ous neutral current during switch off transients three phase faults and phase to phase faults a positive sequence current restraint of 5 is applied to the neutral current supervision magnitude This setting should be at least three times the CURR...

Страница 297: ...ality Figure 5 75 GROUND DISTANCE ZONES 3 AND HIGHER OP SCHEME 25 1 25 5 IURP WKH RSHQ SROH GHWHFWRU HOHPHQW DQG RQO 2 23 5 1 23 1 32 23 2 23 5 1 1 67 3 3 2 23 5 1 1 67 3 3 2 23 5 1 1 67 3 3 7 0 5 PV PV 7 0 5 PV PV 7 0 5 PV PV 6 77 1 1 67 73 3 6 77 1 1 67 73 3 6 77 1 1 67 73 3 2 23 5 1 1 67 23 2 23 5 1 1 67 23 2 23 5 1 1 67 23 2 23 5 1 1 67 23 2 23 5 1 75 3 5 705 1 7 25 25 25 1 25 1 25 1 1 1 IURP ...

Страница 298: ... 1 6 1 67 20 1 581 0 17 581 0 17 581 0 17 1 67 32 855 17 1 67 121 20 1 1 1 67 203 0 7 1 67 5 5 1 67 5 203 0 7 1 67 92 7 9 1 67 48 5 7 1 67 48 5 7 5 1 67 48 7 1 67 48 7 5 7 0 5 F FOH F FOH 6 77 1 1 67 6839 581 _ 1 î B _ 3LFNXS 2 23 5 1 6 1 67 3 3 1 67 32 2 23 5 1 6 1 67 3 3 1 67 32 2 23 5 1 6 1 67 3 3 1 67 32 2 23 5 1 1 67 3 3 2 23 5 1 6 23 1 32 23 ƹ 23 1 32 23 ƹ 23 1 32 23 ƹ DQG RQO 1 67 6831 1 2 ...

Страница 299: ... The supervision is biased toward operation in order to avoid compromising the sensitivity of ground distance elements at low signal levels Otherwise the reverse fault condition that generates concern will have high polarizing levels so that a cor rect reverse fault decision can be reliably made 5 1 1 1 25 4XDGULODWHUDO FKDUDFWHULVWLF RQO 1 25 0 025 9B SX B SX 6 77 1 QDEOHG LVDEOHG 1 67 81 7 21 6 ...

Страница 300: ... of 0 01 MESSAGE POWER SWING QUAD FWD REACH OUT 70 00 Ω Range 0 10 to 500 00 ohms in steps of 0 01 MESSAGE POWER SWING FWD RCA 75 Range 40 to 90 in steps of 1 MESSAGE POWER SWING REV REACH 50 00 Ω Range 0 10 to 500 00 ohms in steps of 0 01 MESSAGE POWER SWING QUAD REV REACH MID 60 00 Ω Range 0 10 to 500 00 ohms in steps of 0 01 MESSAGE POWER SWING QUAD REV REACH OUT 70 00 Ω Range 0 10 to 500 00 oh...

Страница 301: ...ly to power swings If tripping is required for faults during power swing condi tions some elements may be blocked permanently using the POWER SWING BLOCK operand and others may be blocked and dynamically unblocked upon fault detection using the POWER SWING UN BLOCK operand MESSAGE POWER SWING OUTER RGT BLD 100 00 Ω Range 0 10 to 500 00 ohms in steps of 0 01 MESSAGE POWER SWING OUTER LFT BLD 100 00...

Страница 302: ...he outer characteristic If afterwards at any time given the impedance stays within the outer characteristic the locus enters the middle char acteristic but stays outside the inner characteristic for a period of time defined as POWER SWING PICKUP DELAY 2 latch 2 is set as long as the impedance stays inside the outer characteristic If afterwards at any time given the impedance stays within the outer...

Страница 303: ...5 Figure 5 79 POWER SWING DETECT MHO OPERATING CHARACTERISTICS Figure 5 80 EFFECTS OF BLINDERS ON THE MHO CHARACTERISTICS OUTER M I D D L E I N N E R R E V R C A F W D R C A RE V RE AC H INNER LIM IT ANGLE MIDDLE LIMIT ANGLE OUTER LIMIT ANGLE 827843A2 CDR FW D RE AC H R X 842734A1 CDR ...

Страница 304: ...ditions The POWER SWING INCOMING FlexLogic operand indicates an unstable power swing with an incoming locus the locus enters the inner characteristic The POWER SWING OUTGOING FlexLogic operand indicates an unstable power swing with an outgoing locus the locus leaving the outer characteristic This operand can be used to count unstable swings and take certain action only after pre defined number of ...

Страница 305: ...ers and both forward and reverse reach impedances of the quadrilateral characteristics POWER SWING REV REACH This setting specifies the reverse reach of all three mho characteristics and the inner quadrilateral characteristic For a simple system of a line and two equivalent sources this reach should be higher than the positive sequence impedance of the local source Detailed transient stability stu...

Страница 306: ...rval the impedance locus must spend between the middle and inner characteristics before the second step of the out of step tripping sequence is completed This time delay must be set shorter than the time required for the impedance locus to travel between the two characteristics during the fastest expected power swing POWER SWING PICKUP DELAY 3 Controls the out of step tripping function only It def...

Страница 307: ... SWING SHAPE POWER SWING OUTER RGT BLD POWER SWING FWD REACH POWER SWING SUPV POWER SWING REV RCA POWER SWING QUAD FWD REACH MID POWER SWING QUAD REV REACH MID POWER SWING MIDDLE LFT BLD POWER SWING INNER LFT BLD POWER SWING FWD RCA POWER SWING OUTER LFT BLD POWER SWING FUNCTION POWER SWING SOURCE Enabled 1 Disabled 0 V_1 I_1 POWER SWING OUTER POWER SWING MIDDLE POWER SWING INNER 827840A3 CDR AND ...

Страница 308: ... SETTING POWER SWING SEAL IN DELAY POWER SWING DELAY 1 RESET POWER SWING DELAY 1 PICKUP POWER SWING DELAY 2 PICKUP POWER SWING DELAY 3 PICKUP POWER SWING DELAY 4 PICKUP POWER SWING BLK Off 0 POWER SWING TRIP MODE POWER SWING MODE POWER SWING TRIP POWER SWING TMR2 PKP POWER SWING TMR4 PKP POWER SWING OUTGOING POWER SWING TMR3 PKP POWER SWING INCOMING POWER SWING BLOCK POWER SWING UN BLOCK POWER SWI...

Страница 309: ... distance element LOAD ENCROACHMENT LOAD ENCROACHMENT FUNCTION Disabled Range Disabled Enabled MESSAGE LOAD ENCROACHMENT SOURCE SRC 1 Range SRC 1 SRC 2 SRC 3 SRC 4 SRC 5 SRC 6 MESSAGE LOAD ENCROACHMENT MIN VOLT 0 250 pu Range 0 000 to 3 000 pu in steps of 0 001 MESSAGE LOAD ENCROACHMENT REACH 1 00 Ω Range 0 02 to 250 00 ohms in steps of 0 01 MESSAGE LOAD ENCROACHMENT ANGLE 30 Range 5 to 50 in step...

Страница 310: ...lement as shown in the Load encroachment characteristic diagram This setting should be entered in secondary ohms and be calculated as the pos itive sequence resistance seen by the relay under maximum load conditions and unity power factor LOAD ENCROACHMENT ANGLE This setting specifies the size of the blocking region as shown on the Load encroachment characteristic diagram and applies to the positi...

Страница 311: ... factor and loss of life The computation of these elements fol lows IEEE standards C57 91 1995 IEEE Guide for Loading Mineral Oil Immersed Transformers and C57 96 1989 IEEE Guide for Loading Dry Type Distribution Transformers The computations are based on transformer loading conditions ambient temperature and the entered transformer data TRANSFORMER PERCENT DIFFERENTIAL See page 5 174 MESSAGE INST...

Страница 312: ...FUNCTION Disabled Range Disabled Enabled MESSAGE PERCENT DIFFERENTIAL PICKUP 0 100 pu Range 0 050 to 1 000 pu in steps of 0 001 MESSAGE PERCENT DIFFERENTIAL SLOPE 1 25 Range 15 to 100 in steps of 1 MESSAGE PERCENT DIFFERENTIAL BREAK 1 2 000 pu Range 1 000 to 2 000 pu in steps of 0 001 MESSAGE PERCENT DIFFERENTIAL BREAK 2 8 000 pu Range 2 000 to 30 000 pu in steps of 0 001 MESSAGE PERCENT DIFFERENT...

Страница 313: ... 1 Inherent CT inaccuracies 2 Onload tap changer operation it adjusts the transformer ratio and consequently the winding currents 3 CT saturation Figure 5 89 PERCENT DIFFERENTIAL OPERATING CHARACTERISTIC Winding 1 current waveform Winding 2 current waveform Winding n current waveform Magnitude phase angle and zero sequence compensation as required Magnitude phase angle and zero sequence compensati...

Страница 314: ...o the ratio of magnitudes of the 2nd harmonic and fundamental frequency components If low second harmonic ratios during magnetizing inrush conditions are not expected the relay should be set to traditional way of restraining INRUSH INHIBIT MODE This setting specifies mode of blocking on magnetizing inrush conditions Modern transform ers may produce small 2nd harmonic ratios during inrush condition...

Страница 315: ...IFFERENTIAL BREAK 1 PERCENT DIFFERENTIAL BREAK 2 PERCENT DIFFERENTIAL SLOPE 1 PERCENT DIFFERENTIAL PICKUP XFMR PCNT DIFF OP A XFMR PCNT DIFF PKP A XFMR PCNT DIFF PKP B XFMR PCNT DIFF PKP C XFMR PCNT DIFF 2ND A XFMR PCNT DIFF 5TH A XFMR PCNT DIFF 2ND B XFMR PCNT DIFF 5TH B XFMR PCNT DIFF 2ND C XFMR PCNT DIFF 5TH C XFMR PCNT DIFF OP XFMR PCNT DIFF OP B XFMR PCNT DIFF OP C INRUSH INHIBIT FUNCTION INR...

Страница 316: ...be set to alarm or trip in cases where the computed hottest spot temperature is above the pickup threshold for a user specified time considered as transformer overheating INSTANTANEOUS DIFFERENTIAL INST DIFFERENTIAL FUNCTION Disabled Range Disabled Enabled MESSAGE INST DIFFERENTIAL PICKUP 8 000 pu Range 2 000 to 30 000 pu in steps of 0 001 MESSAGE INST DIFF BLOCK Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAG...

Страница 317: ...erate The setting should be greater than the maximum permissible aging factor under emergency loading conditions and maximum ambient tem perature Figure 5 93 AGING FACTOR LOGIC AGING FACTOR AGING FACTOR FUNCTION Disabled Range Disabled Enabled MESSAGE AGING FACTOR PICKUP 2 0 pu Range 1 1 to 10 0 pu in steps of 0 1 MESSAGE AGING FACTOR DELAY 10 min Range 0 to 30000 min in steps of 1 MESSAGE AGING F...

Страница 318: ... computed loss of life will be added to the initial loss of life LOSS OF LIFE PICKUP Enter the expended life in hours required for operation of the element This setting should be above the total transformer life set as a reference based on nominal loading conditions and a 30 C ambient temper ature as outlined in the IEEE standards Figure 5 94 TRANSFORMER LOSS OF LIFE LOGIC LOSS OF LIFE LOSS OF LIF...

Страница 319: ...iplier to zero results in an instantaneous response to all current levels above pickup Time overcurrent time calculations are made with an internal energy capacity memory variable When this variable indi cates that the energy capacity has reached 100 a time overcurrent element will operate If less than 100 energy capac ity is accumulated in this variable and the current falls below the dropout thr...

Страница 320: ...7 14 587 8 007 5 187 3 710 2 837 2 277 1 897 1 626 6 0 136 090 57 130 21 880 12 010 7 780 5 564 4 255 3 416 2 845 2 439 8 0 181 454 76 174 29 174 16 014 10 374 7 419 5 674 4 555 3 794 3 252 10 0 226 817 95 217 36 467 20 017 12 967 9 274 7 092 5 693 4 742 4 065 IEEE VERY INVERSE 0 5 8 090 3 514 1 471 0 899 0 654 0 526 0 450 0 401 0 368 0 345 1 0 16 179 7 028 2 942 1 798 1 308 1 051 0 900 0 802 0 73...

Страница 321: ...0 4 280 3 837 3 528 3 297 3 116 2 971 IEC CURVE B 0 05 1 350 0 675 0 338 0 225 0 169 0 135 0 113 0 096 0 084 0 075 0 10 2 700 1 350 0 675 0 450 0 338 0 270 0 225 0 193 0 169 0 150 0 20 5 400 2 700 1 350 0 900 0 675 0 540 0 450 0 386 0 338 0 300 0 40 10 800 5 400 2 700 1 800 1 350 1 080 0 900 0 771 0 675 0 600 0 60 16 200 8 100 4 050 2 700 2 025 1 620 1 350 1 157 1 013 0 900 0 80 21 600 10 800 5 40...

Страница 322: ... 488 1 239 1 060 0 926 IAC VERY INVERSE 0 5 1 451 0 656 0 269 0 172 0 133 0 113 0 101 0 093 0 087 0 083 1 0 2 901 1 312 0 537 0 343 0 266 0 227 0 202 0 186 0 174 0 165 2 0 5 802 2 624 1 075 0 687 0 533 0 453 0 405 0 372 0 349 0 331 4 0 11 605 5 248 2 150 1 374 1 065 0 906 0 810 0 745 0 698 0 662 6 0 17 407 7 872 3 225 2 061 1 598 1 359 1 215 1 117 1 046 0 992 8 0 23 209 10 497 4 299 2 747 2 131 1 ...

Страница 323: ... instanta neous to 600 00 seconds in steps of 10 ms EQ 5 35 EQ 5 36 where T Operate Time sec TDM Multiplier setting I Input Current Ipickup Pickup Current setting TRESET Reset Time in seconds assuming energy capacity is 100 and RESET Timed RECLOSER CURVES The T60 uses the FlexCurve feature to facilitate programming of 41 recloser curves Please refer to the FlexCurve sec tion in this chapter for ad...

Страница 324: ... by a voltage restraint feature when enabled This is accom plished via the multipliers Mvr corresponding to the phase phase voltages of the voltage restraint characteristic curve see the figure below the pickup level is calculated as Mvr times the PHASE TOC1 PICKUP setting If the voltage restraint feature is disabled the pickup level always remains at the setting value PHASE TOC1 PHASE TOC1 FUNCTI...

Страница 325: ...K C PHASE TOC1 BLOCK B PHASE TOC1 VOLT RESTRAINT PHASE TOC1 A PKP PHASE TOC1 A DPO PHASE TOC1 A OP PHASE TOC1 B PKP PHASE TOC1 B DPO PHASE TOC1 B OP PHASE TOC1 C PKP PHASE TOC1 C DPO PHASE TOC1 C OP PHASE TOC1 PKP PHASE TOC1 OP PHASE TOC1 SOURCE PHASE TOC1 RESET PHASE TOC1 CURVE PHASE TOC1 PICKUP PHASE TOC1 INPUT IA Seq ABC Seq ACB Set Multiplier Set Multiplier Set Multiplier Set Pickup Multiplier...

Страница 326: ...n a 60 Hz system PHASE IOC1 PHASE IOC1 FUNCTION Disabled Range Disabled Enabled MESSAGE PHASE IOC1 SIGNAL SOURCE SRC 1 Range SRC 1 SRC 2 SRC 3 SRC 4 SRC 5 SRC 6 MESSAGE PHASE IOC1 PICKUP 1 000 pu Range 0 000 to 30 000 pu in steps of 0 001 MESSAGE PHASE IOC1 PICKUP DELAY 0 00 s Range 0 00 to 600 00 s in steps of 0 01 MESSAGE PHASE IOC1 RESET DELAY 0 00 s Range 0 00 to 600 00 s in steps of 0 01 MESS...

Страница 327: ...bled Function SETTING IA Source IC SETTINGS Off Block A Off Block B Off Block C SETTING Pickup RUN IA Pickup RUN IB Pickup RUN IC Pickup IB SETTINGS Pickup Delay TPKP TRST Reset Delay TPKP TRST TPKP TRST OR FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS PHASE IOC1 A PKP PHASE IOC1 A DPO PHASE IOC1 B PKP PHASE IOC1 B DPO PHASE IOC1 C PKP PHASE IOC1 C DPO PHASE IOC1 PKP FLEXLOGIC OPERAND PHASE IOC1 A OP PHASE IOC1 B OP PHASE I...

Страница 328: ...s Figure 5 99 PHASE A DIRECTIONAL POLARIZATION PHASE DIRECTIONAL 1 PHASE DIR 1 FUNCTION Disabled Range Disabled Enabled MESSAGE PHASE DIR 1 SIGNAL SOURCE SRC 1 Range SRC 1 SRC 2 SRC 3 SRC 4 SRC 5 SRC 6 MESSAGE PHASE DIR 1 BLOCK Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE PHASE DIR 1 ECA 30 Range 0 to 359 in steps of 1 MESSAGE PHASE DIR POL V1 THRESHOLD 0 700 pu Range 0 000 to 3 000 pu in steps of 0 001 ME...

Страница 329: ...lock or trip on overcurrent as follows When BLOCK WHEN V MEM EXP is set to Yes the directional element will block the operation of any phase overcurrent element under directional control when voltage memory expires When BLOCK WHEN V MEM EXP is set to No the directional element allows tripping of phase overcurrent elements under directional control when voltage memory expires In all cases direction...

Страница 330: ...al element If current reversal is of a concern a longer delay in the order of 20 ms may be needed Figure 5 100 PHASE DIRECTIONAL SCHEME LOGIC NOTE FLEXLOGIC OPERAND FLEXLOGIC OPERAND FLEXLOGIC OPERAND FLEXLOGIC OPERAND SETTING SETTING SETTING SETTING SETTING SETTING PHASE DIR 1 FUNCTION PHASE DIR 1 SOURCE PHASE DIR 1 BLOCK OC WHEN V MEM EXP PHASE DIR 1 BLOCK PHASE DIR 1 ECA PHASE DIR 1 POL V THRES...

Страница 331: ...IN MENU PATH SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1 6 NEUTRAL CURRENT NEUTRAL CURRENT NEUTRAL TOC1 See page 5 194 MESSAGE NEUTRAL TOC2 See page 5 194 MESSAGE NEUTRAL TOC6 MESSAGE NEUTRAL IOC1 See page 5 195 MESSAGE NEUTRAL IOC2 See page 5 195 MESSAGE NEUTRAL IOC12 MESSAGE NEUTRAL DIRECTIONAL OC1 See page 5 196 ...

Страница 332: ...he element is blocked the time accumulator will be cleared immediately Figure 5 101 NEUTRAL TIME OVERCURRENT 1 SCHEME LOGIC NEUTRAL TOC1 NEUTRAL TOC1 FUNCTION Disabled Range Disabled Enabled MESSAGE NEUTRAL TOC1 SIGNAL SOURCE SRC 1 Range SRC 1 SRC 2 SRC 3 SRC 4 SRC 5 SRC 6 MESSAGE NEUTRAL TOC1 INPUT Phasor Range Phasor RMS MESSAGE NEUTRAL TOC1 PICKUP 1 000 pu Range 0 000 to 30 000 pu in steps of 0...

Страница 333: ...lts The positive sequence restraint must be considered when testing for pickup accuracy and response time multiple of pickup The operating quantity depends on how test currents are injected into the relay single phase injection three phase pure zero sequence injection Figure 5 102 NEUTRAL IOC1 SCHEME LOGIC NEUTRAL IOC1 NEUTRAL IOC1 FUNCTION Disabled Range Disabled Enabled MESSAGE NEUTRAL IOC1 SIGN...

Страница 334: ...5 38 The positive sequence restraint allows for more sensitive settings by counterbalancing spurious zero sequence currents resulting from System unbalances under heavy load conditions NEUTRAL DIRECTIONAL OC1 NEUTRAL DIR OC1 FUNCTION Disabled Range Disabled Enabled MESSAGE NEUTRAL DIR OC1 SOURCE SRC 1 Range SRC 1 SRC 2 SRC 3 SRC 4 SRC 5 SRC 6 MESSAGE NEUTRAL DIR OC1 POLARIZING Voltage Range Voltag...

Страница 335: ... tional current The following tables define the neutral directional overcurrent element where ECA element characteristic angle and IG ground current When NEUTRAL DIR OC1 POL VOLT is set to Measured VX one third of this voltage is used in place of V_0 The following figure explains the usage of the voltage polarized directional unit of the element The figure below shows the voltage polarized phase a...

Страница 336: ...polarization The ground CT must be connected between the ground and neutral point of an adequate local source of ground current The ground current must be greater than 0 05 pu to be vali dated as a polarizing signal If the polarizing signal is not valid neither forward nor reverse indication is given In addition the zero sequence current I_0 must be greater than the PRODUCT SETUP DISPLAY PROPERTIE...

Страница 337: ...ance used by this protection The primary appli cation for the offset impedance is to guarantee correct identification of fault direction on series compensated lines In regular applications the offset impedance ensures proper operation even if the zero sequence voltage at the relaying point is very small If this is the intent the offset impedance shall not be larger than the zero sequence impedance...

Страница 338: ...R NEUTRAL DIR OC1 OP CURR NEUTRAL DIR OC1 FWD NEUTRAL DIR OC1 REV Disabled 0 Measured VX Voltage Calculated V_0 Current Ground Crt IG Zero Seq Crt I_0 Dual NOTE 1 CURRENT POLARIZING IS POSSIBLE ONLY IN RELAYS WITH THE GROUND CURRENT INPUTS CONNECTED TO AN ADEQUATE CURRENT POLARIZING SOURCE 2 GROUND CURRENT CAN NOT BE USED FOR POLARIZATION AND OPERATION SIMULTANEOUSLY 3 POSITIVE SEQUENCE RESTRAINT ...

Страница 339: ...ROUND CURRENT For additional information on the Ground Time Overcurrent curves refer to Inverse TOC Characteristics on page 5 181 GROUND CURRENT GROUND TOC1 See page 5 202 MESSAGE GROUND TOC2 MESSAGE GROUND TOC6 MESSAGE GROUND IOC1 See page 5 203 MESSAGE GROUND IOC2 MESSAGE GROUND IOC12 MESSAGE RESTRICTED GROUND FAULT 1 See page 5 204 MESSAGE RESTRICTED GROUND FAULT 6 ...

Страница 340: ...46 times the CT rating This channel may be also equipped with a sensitive input The conversion range of a sensitive channel is from 0 002 to 4 6 times the CT rating Figure 5 105 GROUND TOC1 SCHEME LOGIC GROUND TOC1 GROUND TOC1 FUNCTION Disabled Range Disabled Enabled MESSAGE GROUND TOC1 SIGNAL SOURCE SRC 1 Range SRC 1 SRC 2 SRC 3 SRC 4 SRC 5 SRC 6 MESSAGE GROUND TOC1 INPUT Phasor Range Phasor RMS ...

Страница 341: ... 0 002 to 4 6 times the CT rating Figure 5 106 GROUND IOC1 SCHEME LOGIC GROUND IOC1 GROUND IOC1 FUNCTION Disabled Range Disabled Enabled MESSAGE GROUND IOC1 SIGNAL SOURCE SRC 1 Range SRC 1 SRC 2 SRC 3 SRC 4 SRC 5 SRC 6 MESSAGE GROUND IOC1 PICKUP 1 000 pu Range 0 000 to 30 000 pu in steps of 0 001 MESSAGE GROUND IOC1 PICKUP DELAY 0 00 s Range 0 00 to 600 00 s in steps of 0 01 MESSAGE GROUND IOC1 RE...

Страница 342: ...dent on the ground impedance value and the fault position on the winding with respect to the neutral point The resultant primary current will be negligible for faults on the lower 30 of the winding since the fault voltage is not the system voltage but rather the result of the transformation ratio between the primary windings and the percentage of shorted turns on the secondary Therefore the result...

Страница 343: ...ing signal to cope with the above stability problems while providing for fast and sensitive protection Even with the improved definition of the restraining signal the breaker and a half application of the restricted ground fault must be approached with care and is not recommended unless the settings are carefully selected to avoid maloperation due to CT saturation The differential current is produ...

Страница 344: ...int is removed if the zero sequence component is greater than the positive sequence line 3 or set at the net difference of the two line 2 The raw restraining signal Irest is further post filtered for better performance during external faults with heavy CT satura tion and for better switch off transient control EQ 5 43 where k represents a present sample k 1 represents the previous sample and α is ...

Страница 345: ...ing values I_0 0 033 pu 0 I_2 0 033 pu 0 and I_1 1 033 pu 0 Igd abs 3 0 0333 0 05 0 15 pu IR0 abs 3 0 033 0 05 0 05 pu IR2 3 0 033 0 10 pu IR1 1 033 8 0 1292 pu and Igr 0 1292 pu Despite very low fault current level the differential current is above 100 of the restraining current EXAMPLE 5 INTERNAL LOW CURRENT HIGH LOAD SINGLE LINE TO GROUND FAULT WITH NO FEED FROM THE GROUND Given the following i...

Страница 346: ...P SUPV PICKUP 1 050 pu Range 0 001 to 30 000 pu in steps of 0 001 MESSAGE BF1 USE TIMER 1 Yes Range Yes No MESSAGE BF1 TIMER 1 PICKUP DELAY 0 000 s Range 0 000 to 65 535 s in steps of 0 001 MESSAGE BF1 USE TIMER 2 Yes Range Yes No MESSAGE BF1 TIMER 2 PICKUP DELAY 0 000 s Range 0 000 to 65 535 s in steps of 0 001 MESSAGE BF1 USE TIMER 3 Yes Range Yes No MESSAGE BF1 TIMER 3 PICKUP DELAY 0 000 s Rang...

Страница 347: ...of a current supervised initiate results in the breaker failure ele ment not being initiated for a breaker that has very little or no current flowing through it which may be the case for trans former faults For those situations where it is required to maintain breaker fail coverage for fault levels below the BF1 PH AMP SUPV PICKUP or the BF1 N AMP SUPV PICKUP setting a current supervised initiate ...

Страница 348: ... inserts an opening resistor into the faulted circuit to a lower level after resistor insertion The high set detector is enabled after timeout of timer 1 or 2 along with a timer that will enable the low set detector after its delay interval The delay interval between high set and low set is the expected breaker opening time Both current detectors provide a fast operating time for currents at small...

Страница 349: ...y for three pole tripping schemes BF1 USE TIMER 1 If set to Yes the early path is operational BF1 TIMER 1 PICKUP DELAY Timer 1 is set to the shortest time required for breaker auxiliary contact Status 1 to open from the time the initial trip signal is applied to the breaker trip circuit plus a safety margin BF1 USE TIMER 2 If set to Yes the main path is operational BF1 TIMER 2 PICKUP DELAY Timer 2...

Страница 350: ...roximately 90 of the resistor current This setting is valid only for three pole breaker failure schemes BF1 LOSET TIME DELAY Sets the pickup delay for current detection after opening resistor insertion BF1 TRIP DROPOUT DELAY This setting is used to set the period of time for which the trip output is sealed in This timer must be coordinated with the automatic reclosing scheme of the failed breaker ...

Страница 351: ...1 2II 3KDVH QLWLDWH 6 77 1 2II 7KUHH 3ROH QLWLDWH 6 77 1 2II 8VH 6HDO Q 6 77 1 HV 1R 8VH PS 6XSHUYLVLRQ 6 77 1 HV 1R 3KDVH QLWLDWH 6 77 1 2II 6 77 1 581 3LFNXS 581 3LFNXS 581 3LFNXS QLWLDWHG SKDVH WR EUHDNHU IDLOXUH VLQJOH SROH ORJLF VKHHW 5 5 75 3 2 23 5 1 QLWLDWHG WR EUHDNHU IDLOXUH VLQJOH SROH ORJLF VKHHW 3KDVH XUUHQW 6XSHUYLVLRQ 3LFNXS 6RXUFH 6 77 1 6 77 1 QLWLDWHG SKDVH WR EUHDNHU IDLOXUH VLQ...

Страница 352: ...7 1 1 QLWLDWHG SKDVH IURP VLQJOH SROH EUHDNHU IDLOXUH ORJLF VKHHW 7LPHU 3LFNXS HOD 6 77 1 1 8VH 7LPHU 6 77 1 6 HV UHDNHU 3RV 3KDVH 3 2II UHDNHU 3RV 3KDVH 2II UHDNHU 3RV 3KDVH 2II UHDNHU 7HVW 2Q 2II 1 QLWLDWHG IURP VLQJOH SROH EUHDNHU IDLOXUH ORJLF VKHHW 7LPHU 3LFNXS HOD 6 77 1 1 1 25 1 25 25 6 77 1 3KDVH XUUHQW L6HW 3LFNXS 581 R6HW 7LPH HOD 6 77 1 6 77 1 3KDVH XUUHQW L6HW 3LFNXS 581 R6HW 7LPH HOD ...

Страница 353: ...TO SHEET 2 OF 2 Initiated TO SHEET 2 OF 2 827068 cdr BF1 FUNCTION Disable 0 Enable 1 SETTING BF1 BLOCK Off 0 SETTING BF1 INITIATE Off 0 SETTING BF1 USE SEAL IN YES 1 NO 0 SETTING BF1 USE AMP SUPV YES 1 NO 0 SETTING IA IB IN IC BF1 SOURCE SETTING IA PICKUP RUN BF1 PH AMP SUPV SETTINGS PICKUP BF1 N AMP SUPV PICKUP RUN RUN RUN IB PICKUP IC PICKUP IN PICKUP BKR FAIL 1 RETRIP FLEXLOGIC OPERAND ...

Страница 354: ...ICKUP SETTING AND SETTING BF1 TIMER1 PICKUP DELAY 0 SETTING AND SETTING NO 0 YES 1 BF1 USE TIMER 1 SETTING BKR FAIL 1 T2 OP FLEXLOGIC OPERAND FLEXLOGIC OPERAND NO 0 YES 1 BF1 USE TIMER 3 SETTING BF1 BKR POS2 A 3P Φ Off 0 SETTING BF1 BREAKER TEST ON Off 0 SETTING BF1 TIMER3 PICKUP DELAY 0 SETTING SETTINGS IB PICKUP IC PICKUP IN PICKUP BF1 LOSET TIME DELAY 0 SETTING RUN RUN IA PICKUP RUN BF1 N AMP L...

Страница 355: ...ctioning of other elements through the block feature of those elements Source Transfer Schemes In the event of an undervoltage a transfer signal may be generated to transfer a load from its normal source to a standby or emergency power source The undervoltage elements can be programmed to have a definite time delay characteristic The definite time curve oper ates when the voltage drops below the p...

Страница 356: ...shown below EQ 5 44 where T operating time D undervoltage delay setting D 0 00 operates instantaneously V secondary voltage applied to the relay Vpickup pickup level Figure 5 116 INVERSE TIME UNDERVOLTAGE CURVES At 0 of pickup the operating time equals the UNDERVOLTAGE DELAY setting T D 1 V Vpickup 842788A1 CDR of voltage pickup Time seconds NOTE ...

Страница 357: ...d Phase to Phase MESSAGE PHASE UV1 PICKUP 1 000 pu Range 0 000 to 3 000 pu in steps of 0 001 MESSAGE PHASE UV1 CURVE Definite Time Range Definite Time Inverse Time MESSAGE PHASE UV1 DELAY 1 00 s Range 0 00 to 600 00 s in steps of 0 01 MESSAGE PHASE UV1 MINIMUM VOLTAGE 0 100 pu Range 0 000 to 3 000 pu in steps of 0 001 MESSAGE PHASE UV1 BLOCK Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE PHASE UV1 TARGET Sel...

Страница 358: ...3 SRC 4 SRC 5 SRC 6 MESSAGE PHASE OV1 PICKUP 1 000 pu Range 0 000 to 3 000 pu in steps of 0 001 MESSAGE PHASE OV1 PICKUP DELAY 1 00 s Range 0 00 to 600 00 s in steps of 0 01 MESSAGE PHASE OV1 RESET DELAY 1 00 s Range 0 00 to 600 00 s in steps of 0 01 MESSAGE PHASE OV1 BLOCK Off Range FlexLogic Operand MESSAGE PHASE OV1 TARGET Self reset Range Self reset Latched Disabled MESSAGE PHASE OV1 EVENTS Di...

Страница 359: ...be used as a definite time element The NEUTRAL OV1 PICKUP DELAY setting applies only if the NEUTRAL OV1 CURVE setting is Definite time The source assigned to this element must be configured for a phase VT VT errors and normal voltage unbalance must be considered when setting this element This function requires the VTs to be wye connected Figure 5 119 NEUTRAL OVERVOLTAGE1 SCHEME LOGIC NEUTRAL OV1 N...

Страница 360: ...rating characteristics and equations for both definite and inverse time delay are as for the phase undervoltage element The element resets instantaneously The minimum voltage setting selects the operating voltage below which the element is blocked Figure 5 120 AUXILIARY UNDERVOLTAGE SCHEME LOGIC AUXILIARY UV1 AUX UV1 FUNCTION Disabled Range Disabled Enabled MESSAGE AUX UV1 SIGNAL SOURCE SRC 1 Rang...

Страница 361: ...nnection Figure 5 121 AUXILIARY OVERVOLTAGE SCHEME LOGIC AUXILIARY OV1 AUX OV1 FUNCTION Disabled Range Disabled Enabled MESSAGE AUX OV1 SIGNAL SOURCE SRC 1 Range SRC 1 SRC 2 SRC 3 SRC 4 SRC 5 SRC 6 MESSAGE AUX OV1 PICKUP 0 300 pu Range 0 000 to 3 000 pu in steps of 0 001 MESSAGE AUX OV1 PICKUP DELAY 1 00 s Range 0 00 to 600 00 s in steps of 0 01 MESSAGE AUX OV1 RESET DELAY 1 00 s Range 0 00 to 600...

Страница 362: ...et to Phase ground then the operating quantity for this element will be the phase to ground nominal volt age It is beneficial to use the phase to phase voltage mode for this element when the T60 device is applied on an iso lated or resistance grounded system 3 When the auxiliary voltage Vx is used regarding the condition for None phase voltage setting mentioned above then the 1 pu value is the SYS...

Страница 363: ...ime delay of 20 seconds to operate when above the Volts Hz pickup setting Instantaneous operation can be obtained the same way by set ting the TD multiplier to 0 INVERSE CURVE A The curve for the volts hertz inverse curve A shape is derived from the formula EQ 5 45 where T Operating Time TDM Time Delay Multiplier delay in seconds V fundamental RMS value of voltage pu F frequency of voltage signal ...

Страница 364: ...etpoint pu The volts hertz inverse B curves are shown below Figure 5 124 VOLTS PER HERTZ CURVES INVERSE CURVE B INVERSE CURVE C The curve for the Volts Hertz Inverse Curve C shape is derived from the formula EQ 5 47 where T Operating Time TDM Time Delay Multiplier delay in sec V fundamental RMS value of voltage pu F frequency of voltage signal pu Pickup volts per hertz pickup setpoint pu T TDM V F...

Страница 365: ... System 5 227 5 SETTINGS 5 6 GROUPED ELEMENTS 5 The volts hertz inverse C curves are shown below Figure 5 125 VOLTS PER HERTZ CURVES INVERSE CURVE C Time to trip in seconds Multiples of volts per hertz pickup 830740A1 CDR Time delay setting ...

Страница 366: ... specific protection or control protection element and checking the desired bus box Once the desired element is selected for a specific bus a list of element operate type operands are displayed and can be assigned to a trip bus If more than one operate type operand is required it may be assigned directly from the trip bus menu TRIP BUS 1 TRIP BUS 1 FUNCTION Disabled Range Enabled Disabled MESSAGE ...

Страница 367: ...TRIP BUS 1 LATCHING This setting enables or disables latching of the trip bus output This is typically used when lockout is required or user acknowledgement of the relay response is required TRIP BUS 1 RESET The trip bus output is reset when the operand assigned to this setting is asserted Note that the RESET OP operand is pre wired to the reset gate of the latch As such a reset command the front ...

Страница 368: ...active The SETTING GROUP 1 NAME to SETTING GROUP 6 NAME settings allows to user to assign a name to each of the six settings groups Once programmed this name will appear on the second line of the GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1 6 menu display The relay can be set up via a FlexLogic equation to receive requests to activate or de activate a particular non default settings group The following FlexLo...

Страница 369: ...ange Time out Acknowledge MESSAGE SELECTOR 1 ACK Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE SELECTOR 1 3BIT A0 Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE SELECTOR 1 3BIT A1 Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE SELECTOR 1 3BIT A2 Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE SELECTOR 1 3BIT MODE Time out Range Time out Acknowledge MESSAGE SELECTOR 1 3BIT ACK Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE SELECTOR 1 POWER UP MODE Rest...

Страница 370: ...herwise the change will not take place and an alarm will be set SELECTOR 1 STEP UP This setting specifies a control input for the selector switch The switch is shifted to a new position at each rising edge of this signal The position changes incrementally wrapping up from the last SELECTOR 1 FULL RANGE to the first position 1 Consecutive pulses of this control operand must not occur faster than ev...

Страница 371: ...e SELEC TOR TIME OUT setting after the last activity of the three bit control inputs Note that the stepping up control input and three bit control input have independent acknowledging signals SELECTOR 1 ACK and SELECTOR 1 3BIT ACK accord ingly SELECTOR 1 POWER UP MODE This setting specifies the element behavior on power up of the relay When set to Restore the last position of the selector stored i...

Страница 372: ...hese diagrams T represents a time out setting Figure 5 129 TIME OUT MODE 842737A1 CDR STEP UP 3BIT A0 3BIT A1 3BIT A2 POS 1 POS 2 POS 3 POS 4 POS 5 POS 6 POS 7 BIT 0 BIT 1 BIT 2 pre existing position 2 changed to 4 with a pushbutton changed to 1 with a 3 bit input changed to 2 with a pushbutton T T T T changed to 7 with a 3 bit input STP ALARM BIT ALARM ALARM ...

Страница 373: ...p it should synchronize the setting group to the three bit control input Make the following changes to setting group control in the SETTINGS CONTROL ELEMENTS SETTING GROUPS menu SETTING GROUPS FUNCTION Enabled GROUP 4 ACTIVATE ON SELECTOR 1 POS 4 SETTING GROUPS BLK Off GROUP 5 ACTIVATE ON Off GROUP 2 ACTIVATE ON SELECTOR 1 POS 2 GROUP 6 ACTIVATE ON Off GROUP 3 ACTIVATE ON SELECTOR 1 POS 3 Make the...

Страница 374: ...lowing changes in the SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP USER PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTONS USER PUSHBUTTON 1 menu PUSHBUTTON 1 FUNCTION Self reset PUSHBUTTON 1 DROP OUT TIME 0 10 s The logic for the selector switch is shown below Figure 5 131 SELECTOR SWITCH LOGIC 842012A2 CDR step up acknowledge 3 bit position out ON FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS SELECTOR 1 POS 1 SELECTOR 1 POS 2 SELECTOR 1 POS 3 SELECTOR 1 POS 4 SELECTOR ...

Страница 375: ...w the minimum voltage current setting The UNDERFREQ 1 MIN VOLT AMP setting selects the minimum per unit voltage or current level required to allow the underfre quency element to operate This threshold is used to prevent an incorrect operation because there is no signal to measure This UNDERFREQ 1 PICKUP setting is used to select the level at which the underfrequency element is to pickup For exampl...

Страница 376: ...equency element can be used to control the turbine frequency ramp down at a generating location This element can also be used for feeder reclosing as part of the after load shedding restoration The OVERFREQ 1 SOURCE setting selects the source for the signal to be measured The OVERFREQ 1 PICKUP setting selects the level at which the overfrequency element is to pickup Figure 5 133 OVERFREQUENCY SCHE...

Страница 377: ...rence ΔF slip frequency It can be defined as the time it would take the voltage phasor V1 or V2 to traverse an angle equal to 2 ΔΦ at a frequency equal to the frequency difference ΔF This time can be calculated by SYNCHROCHECK 1 SYNCHK1 FUNCTION Disabled Range Disabled Enabled MESSAGE SYNCHK1 BLOCK Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE SYNCHK1 V1 SOURCE SRC 1 Range SRC 1 SRC 2 SRC 3 SRC 4 SRC 5 SRC ...

Страница 378: ... difference becomes lower than SYNCHK1 MAX FREQ DIFF Once the Synchrocheck element has operated the frequency difference must increase above the SYNCHK1 MAX FREQ DIFF SYNCHK1 MAX FREQ HYSTERESIS sum to drop out assuming the other two conditions voltage and angle remain satisfied SYNCHK1 DEAD SOURCE SELECT This setting selects the combination of dead and live sources that will by pass synchronism c...

Страница 379: ...iary Voltage to check the synchronism conditions If using a single CT VT module with both phase voltages and an auxiliary voltage ensure that only the auxiliary voltage is programmed in one of the sources to be used for synchrocheck Exception Synchronism cannot be checked between Delta connected phase VTs and a Wye con nected auxiliary voltage 2 The relay measures frequency and Volts Hz from an in...

Страница 380: ...TINGS ΔF Maximum Max Freq Diff Freq Hysteresis SETTING ΔΦ Maximum Max Angle Diff SETTING ΔV Maximum Max Volt Diff AND OR XOR AND AND AND AND AND 827076AC CDR ACTUAL VALUES Synchrocheck 1 ΔV Synchrocheck 1 ΔΦ Synchrocheck 1 ΔF AND SETTINGS Enabled 1 Disabled 0 Function Off 0 Block AND AND AND AND FLEXLOGIC OPERAND SYNC1 V2 ABOVE MIN SYNC1 V1 ABOVE MIN SYNC1 V1 BELOW MAX SYNC1 V2 BELOW MAX FLEXLOGIC...

Страница 381: ... for pickup and reset delays for the output operand DIGITAL ELEMENT 1 INPUT Selects a FlexLogic operand to be monitored by the digital element DIGITAL ELEMENT 1 PICKUP DELAY Sets the required time delay from element pickup to element operation If a pickup delay is not required set to 0 To avoid nuisance alarms set the delay greater than the operating time of the breaker DIGITAL ELEMENT 1 RESET DEL...

Страница 382: ...y applications it is desired to monitor the breaker trip circuit integrity so problems can be detected before a trip oper ation is required The circuit is considered to be healthy when the voltage monitor connected across the trip output contact detects a low level of current well below the operating current of the breaker trip coil If the circuit presents a high resis tance the trickle current wi...

Страница 383: ...INTEGRITY MONITORING If it is required to monitor the trip circuit continuously independent of the breaker position open or closed a method to maintain the monitoring current flow through the trip circuit when the breaker is open must be provided as shown in the fig ure below This can be achieved by connecting a suitable resistor see figure below across the auxiliary contact in the trip circuit In...

Страница 384: ...perands are provided to indicate if the present value is more than HI equal to EQL or less than LO the set value COUNTER 1 UP Selects the FlexLogic operand for incrementing the counter If an enabled UP input is received when the accumulated value is at the limit of 2 147 483 647 counts the counter will rollover to 2 147 483 648 COUNTER 1 DOWN Selects the FlexLogic operand for decrementing the coun...

Страница 385: ...d for capturing freezing the accumulated count value into a separate register with the date and time of the operation and resetting the count to 0 COUNTER 1 FREEZE COUNT Selects the FlexLogic operand for capturing freezing the accumulated count value into a separate register with the date and time of the operation and continuing counting The present accumulated value and captured frozen value with...

Страница 386: ...AKER 5 ARCING CURRENT See page 5 249 MESSAGE BREAKER 6 ARCING CURRENT See page 5 249 MESSAGE BREAKER FLASHOVER 1 See page 5 251 MESSAGE BREAKER FLASHOVER 2 See page 5 251 MESSAGE BREAKER RESTRIKE 1 See page 5 255 MESSAGE BREAKER RESTRIKE 2 See page 5 255 MESSAGE BREAKER RESTRIKE 3 See page 5 255 MESSAGE VT FUSE FAILURE 1 See page 5 258 MESSAGE VT FUSE FAILURE 2 See page 5 258 MESSAGE VT FUSE FAILU...

Страница 387: ...duration is defined as a time between operation of the disturbance detector occurring before initiation of this feature and reset of an internal low set overcurrent function Cor rection is implemented to account for a non zero reset time of the overcurrent function Breaker arcing currents and fault duration values are available under the ACTUAL VALUES RECORDS MAINTENANCE BREAKER 1 4 menus BKR 1 AR...

Страница 388: ...G AMP BLOCK BREAKER 1 ARCING AMP INIT A BREAKER 1 ARCING AMP INIT B BREAKER 1 ARCING AMP INIT C BREAKER 1 ARCING AMP LIMIT CLEAR BREAKER 1 ARCING AMPS BKR 1 ARCING AMP A Φ BKR 1 OPERATING TIME A Φ BKR 1 OPERATING TIME B Φ BKR 1 OPERATING TIME C Φ BKR 1 OPERATING TIME BKR 1 ARCING AMP B Φ BKR 1 ARCING AMP C Φ BKR1 ARC OP BKR1 ARC DPO BREAKER 1 ARCING AMP SOURCE IA IB IC Off 0 Off 0 Off 0 Off 0 NO 0...

Страница 389: ...SSAGE BKR 1 FLSHOVR SIDE 2 SRC None Range None SRC 1 SRC 2 SRC 3 SRC 4 SRC 5 SRC 6 MESSAGE BKR 1 STATUS CLSD A Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE BKR 1 STATUS CLSD B Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE BKR 1 STATUS CLSD C Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE BKR 1 FLSHOVR V PKP 0 850 pu Range 0 000 to 1 500 pu in steps of 0 001 MESSAGE BKR 1 FLSHOVR DIFF V PKP 1000 V Range 0 to 100000 V in steps o...

Страница 390: ...tection are 1 52a status 0 2 VAg VBg or VCg is greater than the pickup setting 3 IA IB IC 0 no current flows through the breaker 4 ΔVA is greater than pickup not applicable in this scheme The conditions at flashover detection are 1 52a status 0 2 VAg VBg or VCg is lower than the pickup setting 3 IA IB or IC is greater than the pickup current flowing through the breaker 4 ΔVA is greater than pickup...

Страница 391: ...ailable across the breaker BRK 1 STATUS CLSD A to BRK 1 STATUS CLSD C These settings specify FlexLogic operands to indicate the open status of the breaker A separate FlexLogic operand can be selected to detect individual breaker pole status and provide flashover detection The recommended setting is 52a breaker contact or another operand defining the breaker poles open status BRK 1 FLSHOVR V PKP Th...

Страница 392: ... 1 FLSHOVR OP BRK 1 FLSHOVR PKP BRK 1 FLSHOVR DPO BRK 1 FLSHOVR OP A BRK 1 FLSHOVR DPO B BRK 1 FLSHOVR PKP B BRK 1 FLSHOVR OP B BRK 1 FLSHOVR DPO C BRK 1 FLSHOVR PKP C BRK 1 FLSHOVR OP C BRK 1 FLSHOVR SUPV A BRK 1 STATUS CLSD B BRK 1 FLSHOVR SUPV B BRK 1 STATUS CLSD C BRK 1 FLSHOVR SUPV C BRK 1 FLSHOVR AMP PKP BRK 1 FLSHOVR DIFF V PKP BRK 1 FLSHOVR SIDE 1 SRC BRK 1 FLSHOVR SIDE 2 SRC Enable 1 RUN ...

Страница 393: ... operand is asserted for a short period of time The user can add coun ters and other logic to facilitate the decision making process as to the appropriate actions upon detecting a single restrike or a series of consecutive restrikes A restrike event FlexLogic operand is declared if all of the following hold The current is initially interrupted BREAKER RESTRIKE 1 BREAKER RESTRIKE 1 FUNCTION Disable...

Страница 394: ...SOURCE This setting selects the source of the current for this element This source must have a valid CT bank assigned BREAKER RESTRIKE 1 PICKUP This setting specifies the pickup level of the overcurrent detector in per unit values of CT nominal current BREAKER RESTRIKE 1 RESET DELAY This setting specifies the reset delay for this element When set to 0 ms then FlexLogic operand will be picked up fo...

Страница 395: ... 1 FUNCTION SETTING Off BKR RSTR 1 BLK AND SETTING IA BREAKER RESTRIKE 1 SOURCE IB IC SETTING Off BKR RSTR 1 BKR OPEN SETTING Off BKR RSTR 1 OPEN CMD SETTING Off BKR RSTR 1 CLS CMD AND OR SETTING BREAKER RESTRIKE 1 PICKUP RUN Restrike detection logic 0 TRST SETTING BREAKER RESTRIKE 1 RESET DELAY 0 TRST 0 TRST FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS BKR RESTRIKE 1 OP A BKR RESTRIKE 1 OP B BKR RESTRIKE 1 OP C BKR RESTRI...

Страница 396: ...nificant amount of positive sequence voltage These noted indications of fuse failure could also be present when faults are present on the system so a means of detecting faults and inhibiting fuse failure declarations during these events is pro vided Once the fuse failure condition is declared it will be sealed in until the cause that generated it disappears An additional condition is introduced to...

Страница 397: ...ip time constant I measured overload RMS current Ip measured load RMS current before overload occurs k IEC 255 8 k factor applied to IB defining maximum permissible current above nominal current IB protected element base nominal current THERMAL PROTECTION 1 THERMAL PROTECTION 1 FUNCTION Disabled Range Disabled Enabled MESSAGE THERMAL PROTECTION 1 SOURCE SRC1 Range SRC 1 SRC 2 SRC 3 SRC 4 SRC 5 SRC...

Страница 398: ...uation τrst thermal protection trip time constant Tmin is a minimum reset time setting Figure 5 146 IEC 255 8 SAMPLE OPERATE AND RESET CURVES The thermal overload protection element estimates accumulated thermal energy E using the following equations calculated each power cycle When current is greater than the pickup level In k IB element starts increasing the thermal energy EQ 5 52 When current i...

Страница 399: ...l calculations are performed per phase If the accumulated energy reaches value 1 in any phase the thermal overload protection element operates and only resets when energy is less than 0 05 in all three phases The logic for the thermal overload protection element is shown below Figure 5 147 THERMAL OVERLOAD PROTECTION SCHEME LOGIC Table 5 25 TYPICAL TIME CONSTANTS PROTECTED EQUIPMENT TIME CONSTANT ...

Страница 400: ... pickup logic The permissive echo is programmed as a one shot logic The echo is sent only once and then the echo logic locks out for a settable period of time ECHO LOCKOUT setting The duration of the echo pulse does not depend on the duration or shape of the received POTT RX signal but is settable as ECHO DURATION POTT RX PICKUP DELAY This setting enables the relay to cope with spurious receive si...

Страница 401: ...void a permanent lock up of the transmit receive loop ECHO LOCKOUT This setting defines the lockout period for the echo logic after sending the echo pulse LINE END OPEN PICKUP DELAY This setting defines the pickup setting for validation of the line end open conditions as detected by the Line Pickup logic through the LINE PICKUP LEO PKP FlexLogic operand The validated line end open condition is a r...

Страница 402: ...d 1 Enabled 1 PH DIST Z2 PKP GND DIR O C FWD POTT RX LINE PICKUP LEO PKP POTT TX POTT OP POTT PERMISSIVE ECHO Disabled 0 Disabled 0 837014A9 CDR GND DIST Z2 PKP Off 0 Off 0 SETTINGS SETTINGS SETTINGS SETTINGS SETTINGS POTT RX PICKUP DELAY TRANS BLOCK PICKUP DELAY LINE END OPEN PICKUP DELAY ECHO DURATION TRANS BLOCK RESET DELAY POTT SEAL IN DELAY AND AND OR OR AND AND AND AND AND OR 0 tRST 0 tRST t...

Страница 403: ... a user settable debounce time in order for the T60 to validate the new contact state In the figure below the debounce time is set at 2 5 ms thus the 6th sample in a row validates the change of state mark no 1 in the diagram Once validated de bounced the contact input asserts a corresponding FlexLogic operand and logs an event as per user setting A time stamp of the first sample in the sequence th...

Страница 404: ...o filter the LOW HIGH marks no 1 2 3 and 4 in the figure below and HIGH LOW marks no 5 6 7 and 8 below transitions Figure 5 149 INPUT CONTACT DEBOUNCING MECHANISM AND TIME STAMPING SAMPLE TIMING Contact inputs are isolated in groups of four to allow connection of wet contacts from different voltage sources for each group The CONTACT INPUT THRESHOLDS determine the minimum voltage required to detect...

Страница 405: ...operand will be set to on for only one evaluation of the FlexLogic equations and then return to off If set to Latched the virtual input sets the state of the output operand to the same state as the most recent received input The self reset operating mode generates the output operand for a single evaluation of the FlexLogic equations If the operand is to be used anywhere other than internally in a ...

Страница 406: ...vent damage to the less robust initiating contact This can be done by monitoring an auxiliary contact on the breaker which opens when the breaker has tripped but this scheme is subject to incorrect oper ation caused by differences in timing between breaker auxiliary contact change of state and interruption of current in the trip circuit The most dependable protection of the initiating contact is p...

Страница 407: ...g specifies the contact response under conflicting control inputs that is when both the OPERATE and RESET signals are applied With both control inputs applied simultaneously the contact will close if set to Operate dominant and will open if set to Reset dominant Application Example 1 A latching output contact H1a is to be controlled from two user programmable pushbuttons buttons number 1 and 2 The...

Страница 408: ...nerVista UR Setup example shown Program the Latching Outputs by making the following changes in the SETTINGS INPUTS OUTPUTS CONTACT OUT PUTS CONTACT OUTPUT H1a menu assuming an H4L module OUTPUT H1a OPERATE VO1 OUTPUT H1a RESET VO2 5 8 4 VIRTUAL OUTPUTS PATH SETTINGS INPUTS OUTPUTS VIRTUAL OUTPUTS VIRTUAL OUTPUT 1 96 There are 96 virtual outputs that may be assigned via FlexLogic If not assigned t...

Страница 409: ...e T60 implementation provides 32 of the 96 available UserSt bit pairs The IEC 61850 specification includes features that are used to cope with the loss of communication between transmitting and receiving devices Each transmitting device will send a GSSE GOOSE message upon a successful power up when the state of any included point changes or after a specified interval the default update time if a c...

Страница 410: ...ceiving relay are extracted from GSSE GOOSE messages origi nating in remote devices Each remote input can be selected from a list consisting of DNA 1 through DNA 32 UserSt 1 through UserSt 32 and Dataset Item 1 through Dataset Item 32 The function of DNA inputs is defined in the IEC 61850 specification and is presented in the IEC 61850 DNA Assignments table in the Remote outputs section The functi...

Страница 411: ...hed with the five remote double point status input settings REM DPS IN 1 ID This setting assigns descriptive text to the remote double point status input REM DPS IN 1 DEV This setting selects a remote device ID to indicate the origin of a GOOSE message The range is selected from the remote device IDs specified in the Remote devices section REM DPS IN 1 ITEM This setting specifies the required bits...

Страница 412: ...9 RESETTING PATH SETTINGS INPUTS OUTPUTS RESETTING Some events can be programmed to latch the faceplate LED event indicators and the target message on the display Once set the latching mechanism will hold all of the latched indicators or messages in the set state after the initiating condition has cleared until a RESET command is received to return these latches not including FlexLogic latches to ...

Страница 413: ...irst communication exchange the input will default to Logic 1 When communication resumes the input becomes fully operational Setting DIRECT INPUT 1 DEFAULT STATE to Latest Off freezes the input in case of lost communications If the latest state is not known such as after relay power up but before the first communication exchange the input will default to Logic 0 When communication resumes the inpu...

Страница 414: ... signal from downstream devices say 2 3 and 4 to the upstream device that monitors a single incomer of the busbar as shown in the figure below Figure 5 152 SAMPLE INTERLOCKING BUSBAR PROTECTION SCHEME Assume that Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 is used by Devices 2 3 and 4 to block Device 1 If not blocked Device 1 would trip the bus upon detecting a fault and applying a short coordination time d...

Страница 415: ...e architecture shown below The scheme output operand HYB POTT TX1 is used to key the permission Figure 5 154 SINGLE CHANNEL OPEN LOOP CONFIGURATION In the above architecture Devices 1 and 3 do not communicate directly Therefore Device 2 must act as a bridge The fol lowing settings should be applied UR IED 1 DIRECT OUT 2 OPERAND HYB POTT TX1 DIRECT INPUT 5 DEVICE ID 2 DIRECT INPUT 5 BIT NUMBER 2 th...

Страница 416: ...FlexLogic operands to be sent via the selected communications channel This allows the user to create distributed pro tection and control schemes via dedicated communications channels Some examples are directional comparison pilot schemes and direct transfer tripping It should be noted that failures of communications channels will affect teleprotection functionality The teleprotection function must...

Страница 417: ... outputs is dependent on the number of com munication channels and terminals On two terminal two channel systems they are processed continuously on each chan nel and mapped separately per channel Therefore to achieve redundancy the user must assign the same operand on both channels teleprotection outputs at the sending end or corresponding teleprotection inputs at the receiving end On three termin...

Страница 418: ...oint values with no units The GOOSE UNIT and PU base settings allow the user to configure GOOSE Analog so that it can be used in a FlexElement GOOSE ANALOG INPUT 1 ANALOG 1 DEFAULT 1000 000 Range 1000000 000 to 1000000 000 in steps of 0 001 MESSAGE ANALOG 1 DEFAULT MODE Default Value Range Default Value Last Known MESSAGE GOOSE ANALOG 1 UNITS Range up to 4 alphanumeric characters MESSAGE GOOSE ANA...

Страница 419: ...s devices The following settings are available for each GOOSE uinteger input Table 5 27 GOOSE ANALOG INPUT BASE UNITS ELEMENT BASE UNITS DCmA BASE maximum value of the DCMA INPUT MAX setting for the two transducers configured under the IN and IN inputs FREQUENCY fBASE 1 Hz PHASE ANGLE ϕBASE 360 degrees see the UR angle referencing convention POWER FACTOR PFBASE 1 00 RTDs BASE 100 C SOURCE CURRENT ...

Страница 420: ...ed as a 32 bit unsigned integer number UINTEGER 1 DEFAULT MODE When the sending device is offline and this setting is Last Known the value of the GOOSE uinteger input remains at the last received value When the sending device is offline and this setting value is Default Value then the value of the GOOSE uinteger input is defined by the UINTEGER 1 DEFAULT setting The GOOSE integer input FlexInteger...

Страница 421: ...re automatically generated for every channel available in the specific relay as shown above for the first channel of a type 5F transducer module installed in slot F The function of the channel may be either Enabled or Disabled If Disabled no actual values are created for the chan nel An alphanumeric ID is assigned to each channel this ID will be included in the channel actual value along with the ...

Страница 422: ...re automatically generated for every channel available in the specific relay as shown above for the first channel of a type 5C transducer module installed in the first available slot The function of the channel may be either Enabled or Disabled If Disabled there will not be an actual value created for the channel An alphanumeric ID is assigned to the channel this ID will be included in the channel...

Страница 423: ... 79 124 82 10 58 50 122 119 39 157 74 131 45 10 97 60 140 123 24 165 90 138 25 11 35 70 158 127 07 174 25 145 20 11 74 80 176 130 89 182 84 152 37 12 12 90 194 134 70 191 64 159 70 12 51 100 212 138 50 200 64 167 20 12 90 110 230 142 29 209 85 174 87 13 28 120 248 146 06 219 29 182 75 13 67 130 266 149 82 228 96 190 80 14 06 140 284 153 58 238 85 199 04 14 44 150 302 157 32 248 95 207 45 14 83 160...

Страница 424: ...wing rules are followed If the RRTD 1 FUNCTION setting is Enabled then the RRTD 1 APPLICATION setting value will be written to RRTD device If the RRTD 1 FUNCTION setting is Disabled then RRTD1 APPLICATION setting value is set as None If the RRTD 1 APPLICATION or RRTD 1 TYPE settings are changes then these settings are immediately written to the RRTD device RRTD 1 RRTD 1 FUNCTION Disabled Range Dis...

Страница 425: ...type Four different RTD types are available 100 Ω Nickel 10 Ω Copper 100 Ω Platinum and 120 Ω Nickel The RRTD converts resistance to temperature as per the values in the following table The T60 reads the RTD temper atures from the RRTD once every five seconds and applies protection accordingly The RRTDs can be used to provide RTD bias in the existing thermal model An RRTD open condition is detecte...

Страница 426: ...the range of the RRTD unit RRTD 1 TRIP PKP DELAY This setting specifies time delay for the trip stage until the output can be asserted The range of 5 to 600 seconds differs from the existing RTD settings to correspond to the range of the RRTD unit RRTD 1 TRIP RST DELAY This setting specifies the reset delay to seal in the trip signal RRTD 1 TRIP VOTING This setting allows securing trip signal by v...

Страница 427: ...hecks the driving signal x in equations below for the minimum and maximum limits and subsequently re scales so the limits defined as MIN VAL and MAX VAL match the output range of the hardware defined as RANGE The follow ing equation is applied EQ 5 54 DCMA OUTPUT F1 DCMA OUTPUT F1 SOURCE Off Range Off any analog actual value parameter MESSAGE DCMA OUTPUT F1 RANGE 1 to 1 mA Range 1 to 1 mA 0 to 1 m...

Страница 428: ...ut current The setting is entered in per unit values The base units are defined in the same manner as the FlexElement base units DCMA OUTPUT F1 MAX VAL This setting allows setting the maximum limit for the signal that drives the output This setting is used to control the mapping between an internal analog value and the output current The setting is entered in per unit values The base units are def...

Страница 429: ...ional details is EQ 5 61 The minimum and maximum power values to be monitored in pu are EQ 5 62 The following settings should be entered DCMA OUTPUT H2 SOURCE SRC 1 Ia RMS DCMA OUTPUT H2 RANGE 4 to 20 mA DCMA OUTPUT H2 MIN VAL 0 000 pu DCMA OUTPUT H2 MAX VAL 1 260 pu The worst case error for this application could be calculated by superimposing the following two sources of error 0 5 of the full sc...

Страница 430: ... if the VTs are connected in Delta refer to the Metering conventions section in chapter 6 while at the same time the VT nominal voltage is 1 pu for the settings Consequently the settings required in this example differ from naturally expected by the factor of The worst case error for this application could be calculated by superimposing the following two sources of error 0 5 of the full scale for ...

Страница 431: ...ons based inputs and outputs remain fully operational in test mode If a control action is programmed using direct inputs and outputs or remote inputs and outputs then the test procedure must take this into account When in Forcible mode the operand selected by the TEST MODE FORCING setting dictates further response of the T60 to testing conditions To force contact inputs and outputs through relay s...

Страница 432: ...he voltage across the input terminals The force contact inputs feature provides a method of performing checks on the function of all contact inputs Once enabled the relay is placed into test mode allowing this feature to override the normal function of contact inputs The Test Mode LED will be on indicating that the relay is in test mode The state of each contact input may be programmed as Dis able...

Страница 433: ...nd 3 should open and digital input 4 should close Also contact output 1 should freeze contact output 2 should open contact output 3 should close and contact output 4 should remain fully operational The required settings are shown below To enable user programmable pushbutton 1 to initiate the test mode make the following changes in the SETTINGS TESTING TEST MODE menu TEST MODE FUNCTION Enabled and ...

Страница 434: ...1 MESSAGE PMU 1 VC TEST ANGLE 120 00 Range 180 00 to 180 00 in steps of 0 05 MESSAGE PMU 1 VX TEST MAGNITUDE 500 00 kV Range 0 00 to 700 00 kV in steps of 0 01 MESSAGE PMU 1 VX TEST ANGLE 0 00 Range 180 00 to 180 00 in steps of 0 05 MESSAGE PMU 1 IA TEST MAGNITUDE 1 000 kA Range 0 000 to 9 999 kA in steps of 0 001 MESSAGE PMU 1 IA TEST ANGLE 10 00 Range 180 00 to 180 00 in steps of 0 05 MESSAGE PM...

Страница 435: ...f change of fre quency are substituted with user values while the symmetrical components are calculated from the physical channels The test values are not explicitly marked in the outgoing data frames When required it is recommended to use the user pro grammable digital channels to signal the C37 118 client that test values are being sent in place of the real measurements ...

Страница 436: ...5 298 T60 Transformer Protection System GE Multilin 5 10 TESTING 5 SETTINGS 5 ...

Страница 437: ...See page 6 5 VIRTUAL OUTPUTS See page 6 6 REMOTE DEVICES STATUS See page 6 6 REMOTE DEVICES STATISTICS See page 6 6 DIGITAL COUNTERS See page 6 7 SELECTOR SWITCHES See page 6 7 FLEX STATES See page 6 7 ETHERNET See page 6 7 DIRECT INPUTS See page 6 8 DIRECT DEVICES STATUS See page 6 8 IEC 61850 GOOSE UINTEGERS See page 6 9 EGD PROTOCOL STATUS See page 6 9 TELEPROT CH TESTS See page 6 10 ETHERNET S...

Страница 438: ...NALOGS See page 6 22 PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNIT See page 6 23 VOLTS PER HERTZ 1 See page 6 24 VOLTS PER HERTZ 2 See page 6 24 RESTRICTED GROUND FAULT CURRENTS See page 6 24 TRANSDUCER I O DCMA INPUTS See page 6 24 TRANSDUCER I O RTD INPUTS See page 6 24 ACTUAL VALUES RECORDS USER PROGRAMMABLE FAULT REPORTS See page 6 25 EVENT RECORDS See page 6 25 OSCILLOGRAPHY See page 6 25 DATA LOGGER See page 6 26...

Страница 439: ...GE Multilin T60 Transformer Protection System 6 3 6 ACTUAL VALUES 6 1 OVERVIEW 6 ACTUAL VALUES PRODUCT INFO MODEL INFORMATION See page 6 28 FIRMWARE REVISIONS See page 6 28 ...

Страница 440: ...cates the ID of the virtual input For example Virt Ip 1 refers to the virtual input in terms of the default name The second line of the display indicates the logic state of the virtual input 6 2 3 REMOTE INPUTS PATH ACTUAL VALUES STATUS REMOTE INPUTS The present state of the 32 remote inputs is shown here The state displayed will be that of the remote point unless the remote device has been establ...

Страница 441: ...put in terms of the default name array index The second line of the display indicates the logic state of the contact output For form A contact outputs the state of the voltage and current detectors is displayed as Off VOff IOff On IOn and VOn For form C contact outputs the state is displayed as Off or On TELEPROTECTION INPUTS TELEPROTECTION INPUT 1 1 Off Range Off On MESSAGE TELEPROTECTION INPUT 1...

Страница 442: ...en at least one required remote device is not online b STATISTICS PATH ACTUAL VALUES STATUS REMOTE DEVICES STATISTICS REMOTE DEVICE 1 16 Statistical data two types for up to 16 programmed remote devices is shown here The StNum number is obtained from the indicated remote device and is incremented whenever a change of state of at least one DNA or UserSt bit occurs The SqNum number is obtained from ...

Страница 443: ...rrent position only an integer from 0 through 7 is the actual value 6 2 10 FLEX STATES PATH ACTUAL VALUES STATUS FLEX STATES There are 256 FlexState bits available The second line value indicates the state of the given FlexState bit 6 2 11 ETHERNET PATH ACTUAL VALUES STATUS ETHERNET These values indicate the status of the primary and secondary Ethernet links DIGITAL COUNTERS Counter 1 Counter 1 AC...

Страница 444: ...heck High values for either of these counts may indicate on a problem with wiring the communication channel or one or more relays The UNRETURNED MSG COUNT and CRC FAIL COUNT values can be cleared using the CLEAR DIRECT I O COUNTERS command The DIRECT INPUT 1 to DIRECT INPUT 32 values represent the state of each direct input 6 2 13 DIRECT DEVICES STATUS PATH ACTUAL VALUES STATUS DIRECT DEVICES STAT...

Страница 445: ... messages sent from other devices 6 2 15 EGD PROTOCOL STATUS a FAST EXCHANGE PATH ACTUAL VALUES STATUS EGD PROTOCOL STATUS PRODUCER STATUS FAST EXCHANGE 1 These values provide information that may be useful for debugging an EGD network The EGD signature and packet size for the fast EGD exchange is displayed b SLOW EXCHANGE PATH ACTUAL VALUES STATUS EGD PROTOCOL STATUS PRODUCER STATUS SLOW EXCHANGE...

Страница 446: ...y ID is set to a default value of 0 the chan nel is failed or if the teleprotection inputs outputs are not enabled 6 2 17 ETHERNET SWITCH PATH ACTUAL VALUES STATUS ETHERNET SWITCH These actual values appear only if the T60 is ordered with an Ethernet switch module type 2S or 2T The status informa tion for the Ethernet switch is shown in this menu SWITCH 1 PORT STATUS to SWITCH 6 PORT STATUS These ...

Страница 447: ...rrent Voltage WATTS Positive VARS Negative PF Lead Current Voltage WATTS Negative VARS Negative PF Lag Current Voltage WATTS Negative VARS Positive PF Lead Current Generator Generator Inductive Inductive Resistive Resistive Generator Generator UR RELAY UR RELAY UR RELAY UR RELAY G G M M G G VCG IC VAG IA VBG IB 1 VCG IC VAG IA VBG IB 2 VCG IC VAG IA VBG IB 3 VCG IC VAG IA VBG IB 4 Q Q Q Q PF Lead ...

Страница 448: ...not measurable the phase angles are not referenced The phase angles are assigned as positive in the leading direction and are presented as negative in the lagging direction to more closely align with power system metering conventions This is illustrated below Figure 6 2 UR PHASE ANGLE MEASUREMENT CONVENTION c SYMMETRICAL COMPONENTS The UR series of relays calculate voltage symmetrical components f...

Страница 449: ...strated in the following figure Figure 6 3 MEASUREMENT CONVENTION FOR SYMMETRICAL COMPONENTS ABC phase rotation ACB phase rotation Table 6 1 SYMMETRICAL COMPONENTS CALCULATION EXAMPLE SYSTEM VOLTAGES SEC V VT CONN RELAY INPUTS SEC V SYMM COMP SEC V VAG VBG VCG VAB VBC VCA F5AC F6AC F7AC V0 V1 V2 13 9 0 76 2 125 79 7 250 84 9 313 138 3 97 85 4 241 WYE 13 9 0 76 2 125 79 7 250 19 5 192 56 5 7 23 3 1...

Страница 450: ...ERING TRANSFORMER THERMAL ELEMENTS DIFFERENTIAL AND RESTRAINT REFERENCE WINDING Winding 1 MESSAGE DIFF PHASOR Iad 0 000 pu 0 0 MESSAGE REST PHASOR Iar 0 000 pu 0 0 MESSAGE DIFF 2ND HARM Iad 0 0 fo 0 0 MESSAGE DIFF 5TH HARM Iad 0 0 fo 0 0 MESSAGE DIFF PHASOR Ibd 0 000 pu 0 0 MESSAGE REST PHASOR Ibr 0 000 pu 0 0 MESSAGE DIFF 2ND HARM Ibd 0 0 fo 0 0 MESSAGE DIFF 5TH HARM Ibd 0 0 fo 0 0 MESSAGE DIFF P...

Страница 451: ...nts for this particular source For example if no phase VT is assigned to this source then any voltage energy and power val ues will be unavailable b PHASE CURRENT METERING PATH ACTUAL VALUES METERING SOURCE SRC 1 PHASE CURRENT SOURCE SRC 1 PHASE CURRENT SRC 1 See page 6 15 MESSAGE GROUND CURRENT SRC 1 See page 6 16 MESSAGE PHASE VOLTAGE SRC 1 See page 6 16 MESSAGE AUXILIARY VOLTAGE SRC 1 See page ...

Страница 452: ... source see SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP SIGNAL SOURCES d PHASE VOLTAGE METERING PATH ACTUAL VALUES METERING SOURCE SRC 1 PHASE VOLTAGE MESSAGE SRC 1 PHASOR Ic 0 000 A 0 0 MESSAGE SRC 1 PHASOR In 0 000 A 0 0 MESSAGE SRC 1 ZERO SEQ I0 0 000 A 0 0 MESSAGE SRC 1 POS SEQ I1 0 000 A 0 0 MESSAGE SRC 1 NEG SEQ I2 0 000 A 0 0 GROUND CURRENT SRC 1 SRC 1 RMS Ig 0 000 A MESSAGE SRC 1 PHASOR Ig 0 000 A 0 0 MESSAGE S...

Страница 453: ...TINGS SYSTEM SETUP SIGNAL SOURCES f POWER METERING PATH ACTUAL VALUES METERING SOURCE SRC 1 POWER MESSAGE SRC 1 PHASOR Vab 0 000 V 0 0 MESSAGE SRC 1 PHASOR Vbc 0 000 V 0 0 MESSAGE SRC 1 PHASOR Vca 0 000 V 0 0 MESSAGE SRC 1 ZERO SEQ V0 0 000 V 0 0 MESSAGE SRC 1 POS SEQ V1 0 000 V 0 0 MESSAGE SRC 1 NEG SEQ V2 0 000 V 0 0 AUXILIARY VOLTAGE SRC 1 SRC 1 RMS Vx 0 00 V MESSAGE SRC 1 PHASOR Vx 0 000 V 0 0...

Страница 454: ...AB and VCB are phase to phase voltage phasors Î is the conjugate of I g ENERGY METERING PATH ACTUAL VALUES METERING SOURCE SRC 1 ENERGY The metered values for real and reactive energy are displayed in this menu The SRC 1 text will be replaced by whatever name was programmed by the user for the associated source see SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP SIGNAL SOURCES Because energy values are accumulated these va...

Страница 455: ...r statistical metering purposes Demand calculations are based on the measurement type selected in the SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP DEMAND SRC 1 SRC 1 DMD IA 0 000 A MESSAGE SRC 1 DMD IA MAX 0 000 A MESSAGE SRC 1 DMD IA DATE 2001 07 31 16 30 07 MESSAGE SRC 1 DMD IB 0 000 A MESSAGE SRC 1 DMD IB MAX 0 000 A MESSAGE SRC 1 DMD IB DATE 2001 07 31 16 30 07 MESSAGE SRC 1 DMD IC 0 000 A MESSAGE SRC 1 DMD IC MAX ...

Страница 456: ...low pass filtered The final frequency measurement is passed through a validation filter that eliminates false readings due to signal distortions and transients j CURRENT HARMONICS AND THD METERING PATH ACTUAL VALUES METERING SOURCE SRC 1 CURRENT HARMONICS The metered current harmonics values are displayed in this menu The SRC 1 text will be replaced by whatever name was programmed by the user for ...

Страница 457: ...CKING FREQUENCY The tracking frequency is displayed here The frequency is tracked based on the selection of the reference source with the FREQUENCY AND PHASE REFERENCE setting in the SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP POWER SYSTEM menu Refer to the Power System section of chapter 5 for additional details TRACKING FREQUENCY TRACKING FREQUENCY 60 00 Hz ...

Страница 458: ...Varhours EBASE 10000 MWh or MVAh respectively SOURCE POWER PBASE maximum value of VBASE IBASE for the IN and IN inputs SOURCE THD HARMONICS BASE 1 SOURCE VOLTAGE VBASE maximum nominal primary RMS value of the IN and IN inputs SYNCHROCHECK Max Delta Volts VBASE maximum primary RMS value of all the sources related to the IN and IN inputs VOLTS PER HERTZ BASE 1 00 pu XFMR DIFFERENTIAL CURRENT Xfmr Ia...

Страница 459: ...hout the corresponding time stamp as they become available per the recording rate setting Also the recording post filtering setting is applied to these values PMU 1 PMU 1 VA 0 0000 kV 0 00 Range Va or Vab per VT bank connection MESSAGE PMU 1 VB 0 0000 kV 0 00 Range Va or Vab per VT bank connection MESSAGE PMU 1 VC 0 0000 kV 0 00 Range Va or Vab per VT bank connection MESSAGE PMU 1 VX 0 0000 kV 0 0...

Страница 460: ...D OUTPUTS PATH ACTUAL VALUES METERING TRANSDUCER I O DCMA INPUTS DCMA INPUT xx Actual values for each DCmA input channel that is enabled are displayed with the top line as the programmed channel ID and the bottom line as the value followed by the programmed units PATH ACTUAL VALUES METERING TRANSDUCER I O RTD INPUTS RTD INPUT xx Actual values for each RTD input channel that is enabled are displaye...

Страница 461: ... major output operands generate events not every operand Elements that assert output per phase for example log operating phase output only without asserting the common three phase operand event 6 4 3 OSCILLOGRAPHY PATH ACTUAL VALUES RECORDS OSCILLOGRAPHY This menu allows the user to view the number of triggers involved and number of oscillography traces available The CYCLES PER RECORD value is cal...

Страница 462: ...ME represents the time at which the oldest available samples were taken It will be static until the log gets full at which time it will start counting at the defined sampling rate The NEWEST SAMPLE TIME represents the time the most recent samples were taken It counts up at the defined sampling rate If the data logger channels are defined then both values are static Refer to the COMMANDS CLEAR RECO...

Страница 463: ...CLEAR RECORDS menu for clearing breaker arcing current records The BREAKER OPERATING TIME is defined as the slowest operating time of breaker poles that were initiated to open PMU RECORDS NUMBER OF TRIGGERS 0 Range 0 to 65535 in steps of 1 MESSAGE PMU 1 RECORDING See below PMU 1 RECORDING PMU 1 FORCE TRIGGER Yes Range No Yes MESSAGE PUM 1 AVAILABLE RECORDS 0 Range 0 to 65535 in steps of 1 MESSAGE ...

Страница 464: ...L NUMBER Range standard GE multilin serial number format MESSAGE ETHERNET MAC ADDRESS 000000000000 Range standard Ethernet MAC address format MESSAGE MANUFACTURING DATE 0 Range YYYY MM DD HH MM SS MESSAGE CT VT ADVANCED DIAG ACTIVE No Range Yes No MESSAGE OPERATING TIME 0 00 00 Range operating time in HH MM SS MESSAGE LAST SETTING CHANGE 1970 01 01 23 11 19 Range YYYY MM DD HH MM SS FIRMWARE REVIS...

Страница 465: ...essfully command entry 7 1 2 VIRTUAL INPUTS PATH COMMANDS VIRTUAL INPUTS The states of up to 64 virtual inputs are changed here The first line of the display indicates the ID of the virtual input The second line indicates the current or selected status of the virtual input This status will be a state off logic 0 or on logic 1 COMMANDS MESSAGE COMMANDS VIRTUAL INPUTS MESSAGE COMMANDS CLEAR RECORDS ...

Страница 466: ...te as a minimum must be entered to allow execution of this com mand The new time will take effect at the moment the ENTER key is clicked COMMANDS CLEAR RECORDS CLEAR USER FAULT REPORTS No Range No Yes CLEAR EVENT RECORDS No Range No Yes CLEAR OSCILLOGRAPHY No Range No Yes CLEAR DATA LOGGER No Range No Yes CLEAR BREAKER 1 ARCING AMPS No Range No Yes CLEAR BREAKER 2 ARCING AMPS No Range No Yes CLEAR...

Страница 467: ...ic information after replacement of hardware Once the diagnostic information is cleared all self checking variables are reset to their initial state and diagnostics will restart from scratch 7 1 6 PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNIT ONE SHOT PATH COMMANDS PMU ONE SHOT This feature allows pre scheduling a PMU measurement at a specific point in time This functionality can be used to test for accuracy of the PMU...

Страница 468: ...ized test sets cannot be automatically assumed more accurate than the PMUs under test This calls for a method to verify both the measuring device PMU and the source of signal test set With reference to the figure below the one shot feature could be configured to trigger a high accuracy scope to capture both the time reference signal rising edge of the 1 pps signal of the IRIG B time reference and ...

Страница 469: ...t and the PMU measure ments should not be compared as they are referenced to different time scales Figure 7 2 USING THE PMU ONE SHOT FEATURE TO TEST SYNCHROPHASOR MEASUREMENT ACCURACY COLLECTING SYNCHRONIZED MEASUREMENTS AD HOC The one shot feature can be used for ad hoc collection of synchronized measurements in the network Two or more PMU can be pre scheduled to freeze their measurements at the ...

Страница 470: ...formation will be included if applicable If a tar get message status changes the status with the highest priority will be displayed If a self test error is detected a message appears indicating the cause of the error For example UNIT NOT PROGRAMMED indicates that the minimal relay settings have not been programmed 7 2 3 RELAY SELF TESTS a DESCRIPTION The relay performs a number of self test diagno...

Страница 471: ...ontact the factory Latched target message No Description of problem A FlexLogic equation is incorrect How often the test is performed The test is event driven performed whenever FlexLogic equations are modified What to do Finish all equation editing and use self tests to debug any errors Latched target message No Description of problem The PRODUCT SETUP INSTALLATION RELAY SETTINGS setting indicate...

Страница 472: ...ent will also show which nodes are available for the T60 Latched target message Yes Description of problem The battery is not functioning How often the test is performed The battery is monitored every five seconds The error message displays after 60 sec onds if the problem persists What to do Return the power supply module to GE Digital Energy for battery replacement Latched target message No Desc...

Страница 473: ...blem An Ethernet connection has failed How often the test is performed Monitored every five seconds What to do Check Ethernet connections Port 1 is the primary port and port 2 is the secondary port Latched target message No Description of problem The SNTP server is not responding How often the test is performed Every 10 to 60 seconds What to do Check SNTP configuration and network connections Latc...

Страница 474: ...when a device programmed to receive GOOSE messages stops receiving This can be from 1 to 60 seconds depending on GOOSE packets What to do Check GOOSE setup Latched target message Yes Description of problem The ambient temperature is greater than the maximum operating temperature 80 C How often the test is performed Every hour What to do Remove the T60 from service and install in a location that me...

Страница 475: ...nds via any rear communications port This includes both Ethernet and RS485 connections Any changes to the local or remote passwords enables this functionality When entering a settings or command password via EnerVista or any serial interface the user must enter the correspond ing connection password If the connection is to the back of the T60 the remote password must be used If the connection is t...

Страница 476: ... to Setting and then change the setting or attempt to change the setting and follow the prompt to enter the programmed password If the password is correctly entered access will be allowed Accessibility automatically reverts to the Restricted level according to the access level timeout setting values If an entered password is lost or forgotten consult the factory with the corresponding ENCRYPTED PA...

Страница 477: ...e following procedure describes how the set the com mand or setting password 1 Enter the new password in the Enter New Password field 2 Re enter the password in the Confirm New Password field 3 Click the Change button This button will not be active until the new password matches the confirmation password 4 If the original password is not 0 then enter the original password in the Enter Password fie...

Страница 478: ...assword protected The operand does not generate events or targets If events or targets are required the UNAUTHORIZED ACCESS operand can be assigned to a digital element programmed with event logs or targets enabled The access level timeout settings are shown below PATH SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP SECURITY ACCESS SUPERVISION ACCESS LEVEL TIMEOUTS These settings allow the user to specify the length of in...

Страница 479: ...EOUT This setting represents the timeout delay for local setting access This setting is applicable when the LOCAL SETTING AUTH setting is programmed to any operand except On The state of the FlexLogic oper and is continuously monitored for an off to on transition When this occurs local access is permitted and the timer pro grammed with the ACCESS AUTH TIMEOUT setting value is started When this tim...

Страница 480: ...abled by default The following procedure describes how to enable the settings tem plate for UR series settings files 1 Select a settings file from the offline window of the EnerVista UR Setup main screen 2 Right click on the selected device or settings file and select the Template Mode Create Template option The settings file template is now enabled and the file tree displayed in light blue The se...

Страница 481: ...g on them The setting available to view will be displayed against a yellow background as shown below Figure 8 3 SETTINGS TEMPLATE VIEW TWO SETTINGS SPECIFIED AS EDITABLE 6 Click on Save to save changes to the settings template 7 Proceed through the settings tree to specify all viewable settings c ADDING PASSWORD PROTECTION TO A TEMPLATE It is highly recommended that templates be saved with passwor...

Страница 482: ...gs available for editing Display all settings with settings not available for editing greyed out Use the following procedure to only display settings available for editing 1 Select an installed device or a settings file from the tree menu on the left of the EnerVista UR Setup main screen 2 Apply the template by selecting the Template Mode View In Template Mode option 3 Enter the template password ...

Страница 483: ...template but all settings will be shown The effect of applying the template to the phase time overcurrent settings is shown below Figure 8 6 APPLYING TEMPLATES VIA THE VIEW ALL SETTINGS COMMAND e REMOVING THE SETTINGS TEMPLATE It may be necessary at some point to remove a settings template Once a template is removed it cannot be reapplied and it will be necessary to define a new settings template ...

Страница 484: ... following procedure describes how to lock individual entries of a FlexLogic equation 1 Right click the settings file or online device and select the Template Mode Create Template item to enable the set tings template feature 2 Select the FlexLogic FlexLogic Equation Editor settings menu item By default all FlexLogic entries are specified as viewable and displayed against a yellow background The i...

Страница 485: ...n the front panel display Figure 8 9 SECURED FLEXLOGIC IN GRAPHICAL VIEW b LOCKING FLEXLOGIC EQUATIONS TO A SERIAL NUMBER A settings file and associated FlexLogic equations can also be locked to a specific UR serial number Once the desired FlexLogic entries in a settings file have been secured use the following procedure to lock the settings file to a specific serial number 1 Select the settings f...

Страница 486: ...can be compared with the T60 actual values at any later date to determine if security has been compromised The traceability information is only included in the settings file if a complete settings file is either transferred to the T60 device or obtained from the T60 device Any partial settings transfers by way of drag and drop do not add the traceability information to the settings file Figure 8 1...

Страница 487: ...uration since the settings file was saved a SETTINGS FILE TRACEABILITY INFORMATION The serial number and file transfer date are saved in the settings files when they sent to a T60 device The T60 serial number and file transfer date are included in the settings file device definition within the EnerVista UR Setup offline window as shown in the example below Figure 8 12 DEVICE DEFINITION SHOWING TRA...

Страница 488: ...N SERIAL NUMBER ACTUAL VALUES PRODUCT INFO MODEL INFORMATION LAST SETTING CHANGE c ADDITIONAL TRACEABILITY RULES The following additional rules apply for the traceability feature If the user changes any settings within the settings file in the offline window then the traceability information is removed from the settings file If the user creates a new settings file then no traceability information ...

Страница 489: ...rity management system is disabled by default This allows access to the device immediately after installation When security is disabled all users are granted administrator access 1 Select the Security User Management menu item to open the user management configuration window 2 Check the Enable Security box in the lower left corner to enable the security management system Security is now enabled fo...

Страница 490: ... the user when exiting the user management configuration window Actual Values Checking this box allows the user to read actual values Settings Checking this box allows the user to read setting values Commands Checking this box allows the user to execute commands Event Recorder Checking this box allows the user to use the digital fault recorder FlexLogic Checking this box allows the user to read Fl...

Страница 491: ...box allows the user to execute commands Event Recorder Checking this box allows the user to use the digital fault recorder FlexLogic Checking this box allows the user to read FlexLogic values Update Info Checking this box allows the user to write to any function to which they have read privileges When any of the Settings Event Recorder and FlexLogic boxes are checked by themselves the user is gran...

Страница 492: ...8 18 T60 Transformer Protection System GE Multilin 8 3 ENERVISTA SECURITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM 8 SECURITY 8 ...

Страница 493: ...the Winding 1 Phase A CT input and y current IY into the Wind ing 2 Phase A CT input TESTING The tests of the differential restraint characteristic verify the minimum pickup point the intersection point of Breakpoint 1 and Slope 1 and the intersection point of Breakpoint 2 and Slope 2 For simplicity enter the following settings for each winding SYSTEM SETUP TRANSFORMER WINDING 1 4 WINDING 1 4 CONN...

Страница 494: ... 2 is tested as follows Refer to the diagram below for details 1 Preset the Iy current to a magnitude that results in the restraint current being equal to Breakpoint 2 Use the following calculation to define the magnitude of the injected current EQ 9 5 2 At the above current restraint the IXOP2 current required to operate the element is calculated as EQ 9 6 3 Preset the Ix current to and switch on...

Страница 495: ...ates graphically whether the relay should operate based on the settings and winding current injection This allows the tester to define and confirm various points on the operating characteristic The spreadsheet can be found at GE Multilin website look for the T35 T60 Percent Differential Element Simulator in the support documents for the product Figure 9 2 CURRENT DISTRIBUTION ON A Y YG0 TRANSFORME...

Страница 496: ...de Ir The differential current Id is the vector sum of the compensated currents and Ir is the larg est compensated current Compensation refers to vector and magnitude corrections applied to the currents from the HV and LV transformer sides The tests verify the operation and no operation response for points from all regions of the percentage differential character istic These tests are Test for zer...

Страница 497: ...u The relay will not operate since Id is still lower that the 0 1 pu MINIMUM PICKUP setting 6 Increase I1 to 0 2 A The differential current increases to and 7 Verify that the Percent Differential element operates and the following are displayed in the actual values menu WINDING 1 WINDING 2 PHASE SINGLE CURRENT I1 PHASE SINGLE CURRENT I2 A 0 A 0 A 0 A 0 B 0 434 A 0 B 0 8 A 180 C 0 434 A 180 C 0 8 A...

Страница 498: ...e 1 setting of 15 The actual ratio is 11 3 3 Adjust the I1 current as shown below thereby increasing Id and verify that the element operates 4 The following differential and restraint current should appear in the T60 actual values menu 5 The actual ratio is now 17 Verify that the element operates correctly WINDING 1 WINDING 2 PHASE SINGLE CURRENT I1 PHASE SINGLE CURRENT I2 A 0 A 0 A 0 A 0 B 0 48 A...

Страница 499: ...ebsite at look in the support documents for the product With this tool the user can see the preset curve point ratios and the actual ratio as per the entered test currents The tool graphically indicates differential and restraint current magnitudes and indi cates whether the relay should operate 3 In this example a ratio of causes the element to trip Decreasing I1 as shown in the table below incre...

Страница 500: ...be the principles of testing the differential element for all regions from the operating characteristic For verification of more points one should consider adjusting the magnitude of the restraint current Ir to the desired portion of the characteristic and change the other current to vary Id until the relay operates Use the Excel tool to compare the actual and expected operating values A blank res...

Страница 501: ... 521 180 0 102 0 0 3 180 Operate Id 0 102 Min PKP B 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 C 0 108 180 0 0 0 102 0 0 3 0 Slope 1 A 0 4435 0 1 6 180 0 110 0 0 9026 180 Block Id Ir 11 9 B 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 C 0 4435 180 0 0 0 0 0 0 Slope 1 A 0 4425 0 1 7 180 0 165 0 0 979 180 Operate Id Ir 16 8 B 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 C 0 4425 180 0 0 0 165 0 0 979 0 Intermediate Slope 1 2 A 1 2 0 5 180 0 675 180 2 882 180 Block Id Ir 23 4 B 0 0 0...

Страница 502: ...ge the Min PKP to 0 2 pu A 0 25 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Block Id 0 051 Min PKP B 0 5 180 0 95 0 0 154 0 0 948 0 C 0 25 0 0 95 180 0 155 0 0 950 180 Minimum Pickup A 0 25 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Operate Id 0 102 Min PKP B 0 5 180 1 05 0 0 253 0 1 049 0 C 0 25 0 1 05 180 0 255 0 1 050 180 Slope 1 return the Min PKP to 0 1 pu A 0 25 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Block Id Ir 13 2 B 0 5 180 0 92 0 0 123 0 0 919 0 C 0 25 0 0 92 180 0 123 ...

Страница 503: ... 0 0 486 270 C 0 21 270 0 486 90 0 101 0 0 486 90 Slope 1 A 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Block Id Ir 14 15 B 0 651 90 1 39 270 0 195 0 1 39 270 C 0 651 270 1 39 90 0 195 0 1 39 90 Slope 1 A 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Operate Id Ir 16 8 15 B 0 63 90 1 39 270 0 233 0 1 39 270 C 0 63 270 1 39 90 0 233 0 1 39 90 Intermediate Slope 1 2 A 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Block Id Ir 52 6 60 computed B 1 2 90 4 63 270 2 44 270 4 63 270 C 1 2 27...

Страница 504: ...follows For INRUSH INHIBIT MODE set to 2 out of 3 1 Set the INRUSH INHIBIT FUNCTION to Trad 2nd and the INRUSH INHIBIT LEVEL to 20 2 Inject currents into one CT bank one winding only until the biased differential operates for all three phases 3 Apply a second harmonic to Phase A higher than the set threshold and monitor operation of Phases A B and C The element should stay operated on all three ph...

Страница 505: ...to the relay until the biased Differential element operates 3 Confirm that ONLY the differential element has operated 4 Increase the 5th harmonic content level until the element drops out Record this value as the Overexcitation Inhibit Level Pickup 5 Gradually decrease the harmonic content level until the element picks up Record this value as the Overexcitation Inhibit Level Dropout 6 Switch off t...

Страница 506: ... zero sequence component As such the same signal must not be injected to all three phases or the injected signal will be completely filtered out For an underfrequency element using phase quantities the phase A signal must be above the MIN VOLT AMP setting value There fore either inject into phase A only or inject a balanced three phase signal Figure 9 6 TYPICAL UNDERFREQUENCY ELEMENT TEST TIMING T...

Страница 507: ...e time timer This is exclusive of the time taken by the frequency responding component to pickup The T60 oscillography can be used to measure the time between the calculated source frequency crossing the threshold and element operation however this method omits the delay in the calculated source frequency The security features of the source frequency measurement algorithm result in the calculated ...

Страница 508: ...___ Id _______________ B C Min Pickup A Status ____________ Id _______________ B C Slope 1 A Status ____________ Id Ir _____________ B C Slope 1 A Status ____________ Id Ir _____________ B C Intermediate Slope 1 2 A Status ____________ Id Ir _____________ B C Intermediate Slope 1 2 A Status ____________ Id Ir _____________ B C Slope 2 A Status ____________ Id Ir _____________ B C Slope 2 A Status ...

Страница 509: ...MISSIONING 9 6 COMMISSIONING TEST TABLES 9 9 6 3 OVEREXCITATION INHIBIT TESTS Table 9 5 OVEREXCITATION INHIBIT TEST RESULTS PHASE INJECTED DISPLAYED STATUS BLOCK OPERATE W1 CURRENT A W1 5TH HARMONIC W2 CURRENT A W2 5TH HARMONIC Id PU 5TH HARMONIC Ir PU A B C ...

Страница 510: ...9 18 T60 Transformer Protection System GE Multilin 9 6 COMMISSIONING TEST TABLES 9 COMMISSIONING 9 ...

Страница 511: ...r UR device for example to comply with data security regu lations On the computer settings files can identified by the urs extension To clear the current settings file create a default set tings file write it to the relay then delete all other urs files For the existing installation upgrading the firmware overwrites the flash memory Other files can be in standard formats such as COMTRADE or csv Yo...

Страница 512: ...pack the unit in a box with bubble wrap foam material or styrofoam inserts or packaging peanuts to cushion the item s You may also use double boxing whereby you place the box in a larger box that contains at least 5 cm of cushioning material Ship the unit by courier or freight forwarder along with the Commercial Invoice and RMA to the factory GE DIGITAL ENERGY 650 MARKLAND STREET MARKHAM ONTARIO C...

Страница 513: ...E Store the unit indoors in a cool dry place If possible store in the original packaging Follow the storage temperature range outlined in the Specifications To avoid deterioration of electrolytic capacitors power up units that are stored in a de energized state once per year for one hour continuously NOTICE ...

Страница 514: ...an the battery there are no special requirements for disposal of the unit at the end its service life For customers located in the European Union dispose of the battery as outlined earlier To prevent non intended use of the unit remove the modules as outlined earlier dismantle the unit and recycle the metal when possible ...

Страница 515: ...ed ground current magnitude 6144 SRC 1 Ia RMS Amps Source 1 phase A current RMS 6146 SRC 1 Ib RMS Amps Source 1 phase B current RMS 6148 SRC 1 Ic RMS Amps Source 1 phase C current RMS 6150 SRC 1 In RMS Amps Source 1 neutral current RMS 6152 SRC 1 Ia Mag Amps Source 1 phase A current magnitude 6154 SRC 1 Ia Angle Degrees Source 1 phase A current angle 6155 SRC 1 Ib Mag Amps Source 1 phase B current...

Страница 516: ... magnitude 6282 SRC 3 Ia Angle Degrees Source 3 phase A current angle 6283 SRC 3 Ib Mag Amps Source 3 phase B current magnitude 6285 SRC 3 Ib Angle Degrees Source 3 phase B current angle 6286 SRC 3 Ic Mag Amps Source 3 phase C current magnitude 6288 SRC 3 Ic Angle Degrees Source 3 phase C current angle 6289 SRC 3 In Mag Amps Source 3 neutral current magnitude 6291 SRC 3 In Angle Degrees Source 3 n...

Страница 517: ...rent angle 6411 SRC 5 Ib Mag Amps Source 5 phase B current magnitude 6413 SRC 5 Ib Angle Degrees Source 5 phase B current angle 6414 SRC 5 Ic Mag Amps Source 5 phase C current magnitude 6416 SRC 5 Ic Angle Degrees Source 5 phase C current angle 6417 SRC 5 In Mag Amps Source 5 neutral current magnitude 6419 SRC 5 In Angle Degrees Source 5 neutral current angle 6420 SRC 5 Ig RMS Amps Source 5 ground...

Страница 518: ... voltage angle 6668 SRC 1 Vcg Mag Volts Source 1 phase CG voltage magnitude 6670 SRC 1 Vcg Angle Degrees Source 1 phase CG voltage angle 6671 SRC 1 Vab RMS Volts Source 1 phase AB voltage RMS 6673 SRC 1 Vbc RMS Volts Source 1 phase BC voltage RMS 6675 SRC 1 Vca RMS Volts Source 1 phase CA voltage RMS 6677 SRC 1 Vab Mag Volts Source 1 phase AB voltage magnitude 6679 SRC 1 Vab Angle Degrees Source 1...

Страница 519: ...e sequence voltage angle 6784 SRC 3 Vag RMS Volts Source 3 phase AG voltage RMS 6786 SRC 3 Vbg RMS Volts Source 3 phase BG voltage RMS 6788 SRC 3 Vcg RMS Volts Source 3 phase CG voltage RMS 6790 SRC 3 Vag Mag Volts Source 3 phase AG voltage magnitude 6792 SRC 3 Vag Angle Degrees Source 3 phase AG voltage angle 6793 SRC 3 Vbg Mag Volts Source 3 phase BG voltage magnitude 6795 SRC 3 Vbg Angle Degree...

Страница 520: ... Vx Angle Degrees Source 4 auxiliary voltage angle 6883 SRC 4 V_0 Mag Volts Source 4 zero sequence voltage magnitude 6885 SRC 4 V_0 Angle Degrees Source 4 zero sequence voltage angle 6886 SRC 4 V_1 Mag Volts Source 4 positive sequence voltage magnitude 6888 SRC 4 V_1 Angle Degrees Source 4 positive sequence voltage angle 6889 SRC 4 V_2 Mag Volts Source 4 negative sequence voltage magnitude 6891 SR...

Страница 521: ...ab Mag Volts Source 6 phase AB voltage magnitude 6999 SRC 6 Vab Angle Degrees Source 6 phase AB voltage angle 7000 SRC 6 Vbc Mag Volts Source 6 phase BC voltage magnitude 7002 SRC 6 Vbc Angle Degrees Source 6 phase BC voltage angle 7003 SRC 6 Vca Mag Volts Source 6 phase CA voltage magnitude 7005 SRC 6 Vca Angle Degrees Source 6 phase CA voltage angle 7006 SRC 6 Vx RMS Volts Source 6 auxiliary vol...

Страница 522: ...3 three phase real power 7234 SRC 3 Pa Watts Source 3 phase A real power 7236 SRC 3 Pb Watts Source 3 phase B real power 7238 SRC 3 Pc Watts Source 3 phase C real power 7240 SRC 3 Q Vars Source 3 three phase reactive power 7242 SRC 3 Qa Vars Source 3 phase A reactive power 7244 SRC 3 Qb Vars Source 3 phase B reactive power 7246 SRC 3 Qc Vars Source 3 phase C reactive power 7248 SRC 3 S VA Source 3...

Страница 523: ... PF Source 5 phase C power factor 7328 SRC 6 P Watts Source 6 three phase real power 7330 SRC 6 Pa Watts Source 6 phase A real power 7332 SRC 6 Pb Watts Source 6 phase B real power 7334 SRC 6 Pc Watts Source 6 phase C real power 7336 SRC 6 Q Vars Source 6 three phase reactive power 7338 SRC 6 Qa Vars Source 6 phase A reactive power 7340 SRC 6 Qb Vars Source 6 phase B reactive power 7342 SRC 6 Qc V...

Страница 524: ...Watt Watts Source 5 real power demand 7752 SRC 5 Demand var Vars Source 5 reactive power demand 7754 SRC 5 Demand Va VA Source 5 apparent power demand 7760 SRC 6 Demand Ia Amps Source 6 phase A current demand 7762 SRC 6 Demand Ib Amps Source 6 phase B current demand 7764 SRC 6 Demand Ic Amps Source 6 phase C current demand 7766 SRC 6 Demand Watt Watts Source 6 real power demand 7768 SRC 6 Demand v...

Страница 525: ...grees Phasor measurement unit 1 phase A voltage angle 9539 PMU 1 Vb Mag Volts Phasor measurement unit 1 phase B voltage magnitude 9541 PMU 1 Vb Angle Degrees Phasor measurement unit 1 phase B voltage angle 9542 PMU 1 Vc Mag Volts Phasor measurement unit 1 phase C voltage magnitude 9544 PMU 1 Vc Angle Degrees Phasor measurement unit 1 phase C voltage angle 9545 PMU 1 Vx Mag Volts Phasor measurement...

Страница 526: ...enth harmonic 10256 SRC 1 Ia Harm 15 Source 1 phase A current seventeenth harmonic 10257 SRC 1 Ia Harm 16 Source 1 phase A current eighteenth harmonic 10258 SRC 1 Ia Harm 17 Source 1 phase A current nineteenth harmonic 10259 SRC 1 Ia Harm 18 Source 1 phase A current twentieth harmonic 10260 SRC 1 Ia Harm 19 Source 1 phase A current twenty first harmonic 10261 SRC 1 Ia Harm 20 Source 1 phase A curr...

Страница 527: ...319 SRC 1 Ic Harm 12 Source 1 phase C current fourteenth harmonic 10320 SRC 1 Ic Harm 13 Source 1 phase C current fifteenth harmonic 10321 SRC 1 Ic Harm 14 Source 1 phase C current sixteenth harmonic 10322 SRC 1 Ic Harm 15 Source 1 phase C current seventeenth harmonic 10323 SRC 1 Ic Harm 16 Source 1 phase C current eighteenth harmonic 10324 SRC 1 Ic Harm 17 Source 1 phase C current nineteenth harm...

Страница 528: ...10382 SRC 2 Ib Harm 9 Source 2 phase B current eleventh harmonic 10383 SRC 2 Ib Harm 10 Source 2 phase B current twelfth harmonic 10384 SRC 2 Ib Harm 11 Source 2 phase B current thirteenth harmonic 10385 SRC 2 Ib Harm 12 Source 2 phase B current fourteenth harmonic 10386 SRC 2 Ib Harm 13 Source 2 phase B current fifteenth harmonic 10387 SRC 2 Ib Harm 14 Source 2 phase B current sixteenth harmonic ...

Страница 529: ...onic 10445 SRC 3 Ia Harm 6 Source 3 phase A current eighth harmonic 10446 SRC 3 Ia Harm 7 Source 3 phase A current ninth harmonic 10447 SRC 3 Ia Harm 8 Source 3 phase A current tenth harmonic 10448 SRC 3 Ia Harm 9 Source 3 phase A current eleventh harmonic 10449 SRC 3 Ia Harm 10 Source 3 phase A current twelfth harmonic 10450 SRC 3 Ia Harm 11 Source 3 phase A current thirteenth harmonic 10451 SRC ...

Страница 530: ...onic 10508 SRC 3 Ic Harm 3 Source 3 phase C current fifth harmonic 10509 SRC 3 Ic Harm 4 Source 3 phase C current sixth harmonic 10510 SRC 3 Ic Harm 5 Source 3 phase C current seventh harmonic 10511 SRC 3 Ic Harm 6 Source 3 phase C current eighth harmonic 10512 SRC 3 Ic Harm 7 Source 3 phase C current ninth harmonic 10513 SRC 3 Ic Harm 8 Source 3 phase C current tenth harmonic 10514 SRC 3 Ic Harm ...

Страница 531: ...tion 10571 SRC 4 Ib Harm 0 Source 4 phase B current second harmonic 10572 SRC 4 Ib Harm 1 Source 4 phase B current third harmonic 10573 SRC 4 Ib Harm 2 Source 4 phase B current fourth harmonic 10574 SRC 4 Ib Harm 3 Source 4 phase B current fifth harmonic 10575 SRC 4 Ib Harm 4 Source 4 phase B current sixth harmonic 10576 SRC 4 Ib Harm 5 Source 4 phase B current seventh harmonic 10577 SRC 4 Ib Harm...

Страница 532: ...RC 4 Ic Harm 22 Source 4 phase C current twenty fourth harmonic 10627 SRC 4 Ic Harm 23 Source 4 phase C current twenty fifth harmonic 10628 SRC 5 Ia THD Source 5 phase A current total harmonic distortion 10629 SRC 5 Ia Harm 0 Source 5 phase A current second harmonic 10630 SRC 5 Ia Harm 1 Source 5 phase A current third harmonic 10631 SRC 5 Ia Harm 2 Source 5 phase A current fourth harmonic 10632 SR...

Страница 533: ...RC 5 Ib Harm 19 Source 5 phase B current twenty first harmonic 10674 SRC 5 Ib Harm 20 Source 5 phase B current twenty second harmonic 10675 SRC 5 Ib Harm 21 Source 5 phase B current twenty third harmonic 10676 SRC 5 Ib Harm 22 Source 5 phase B current twenty fourth harmonic 10677 SRC 5 Ib Harm 23 Source 5 phase B current twenty fifth harmonic 10678 SRC 5 Ic THD Source 5 phase C current total harmo...

Страница 534: ...20 SRC 6 Ia Harm 16 Source 6 phase A current eighteenth harmonic 10721 SRC 6 Ia Harm 17 Source 6 phase A current nineteenth harmonic 10722 SRC 6 Ia Harm 18 Source 6 phase A current twentieth harmonic 10723 SRC 6 Ia Harm 19 Source 6 phase A current twenty first harmonic 10724 SRC 6 Ia Harm 20 Source 6 phase A current twenty second harmonic 10725 SRC 6 Ia Harm 21 Source 6 phase A current twenty thir...

Страница 535: ...Ic Harm 12 Source 6 phase C current fourteenth harmonic 10767 SRC 6 Ic Harm 13 Source 6 phase C current fifteenth harmonic 10768 SRC 6 Ic Harm 14 Source 6 phase C current sixteenth harmonic 10769 SRC 6 Ic Harm 15 Source 6 phase C current seventeenth harmonic 10770 SRC 6 Ic Harm 16 Source 6 phase C current eighteenth harmonic 10771 SRC 6 Ic Harm 17 Source 6 phase C current nineteenth harmonic 10772...

Страница 536: ...uts 11 Value RTD input 11 actual value 13563 RTD Inputs 12 Value RTD input 12 actual value 13564 RTD Inputs 13 Value RTD input 13 actual value 13565 RTD Inputs 14 Value RTD input 14 actual value 13566 RTD Inputs 15 Value RTD input 15 actual value 13567 RTD Inputs 16 Value RTD input 16 actual value 13568 RTD Inputs 17 Value RTD input 17 actual value 13569 RTD Inputs 18 Value RTD input 18 actual val...

Страница 537: ...0 RRTD RTD 9 Value C Remote RTD input 9 actual value 34761 RRTD RTD 10 Value C Remote RTD input 10 actual value 34762 RRTD RTD 11 Value C Remote RTD input 11 actual value 34763 RRTD RTD 12 Value C Remote RTD input 12 actual value 39425 FlexElement 1 Value FlexElement 1 actual value 39427 FlexElement 2 Value FlexElement 2 actual value 39429 FlexElement 3 Value FlexElement 3 actual value 39431 FlexE...

Страница 538: ...g input 16 Table A 2 FLEXINTEGER DATA ITEMS ADDRESS FLEXINTEGER NAME UNITS DESCRIPTION 9736 PMU 1 SOC seconds PMU 1 SOC timestamps 9738 PMU 1 FRACSEC seconds PMU 1 FRACSEC timestamps 9740 PMU 1 STAT PMU 1 STAT flags 9968 GOOSE UInt Input 1 IEC61850 GOOSE UInteger input 1 9970 GOOSE UInt Input 2 IEC61850 GOOSE UInteger input 2 9972 GOOSE UInt Input 3 IEC61850 GOOSE UInteger input 3 9974 GOOSE UInt ...

Страница 539: ...nal RS485 port can be set for baud rates of 300 1200 2400 4800 9600 14400 19200 28800 33600 38400 57600 or 115200 bps and even odd and no parity options are available See the Communications section of chapter 5 for further details The Modbus TCP IP protocol is available on each of the rear Ethernet ports Depending on the relay s order code these ports can be 10 100Base TX or 100Base FX B 1 3 DATA ...

Страница 540: ...he following describes the ADU MBAP header This Modbus Application Protocol header contains the following fields Transaction Identifier Used for transaction pairing The Modbus server copies in the response the transaction identifier of the request Protocol Identifier Used for intra system multiplexing The Modbus protocol is identified by the value 0 Length The length field is a byte count of the f...

Страница 541: ...l number of data bytes Di i th data byte i 0 to N 1 G 16 bit characteristic polynomial 1010000000000001 binary with MSbit dropped and bit order reversed shr x right shift operator th LSbit of x is shifted into a carry flag a 0 is shifted into the MSbit of x all other bits are shifted right one location ALGORITHM 1 FFFF hex A 2 0 i 3 0 j 4 Di Alow Alow 5 j 1 j 6 shr A 7 Is there a carry No go to 8 ...

Страница 542: ... read Function codes 03h and 04h are therefore identical The following table shows the format of the master and slave packets in Modbus RTU Modbus TCP IP ADUs have a MBAP instead of slave address and CRC is in another stack layer The example shows a master device requesting three register values starting at address 4050h from slave device 11h 17 decimal the slave device responds with the values 40...

Страница 543: ...0 at memory map address 4051h to slave device 11h 17 dec Table B 5 MASTER AND SLAVE DEVICE PACKET TRANSMISSION EXAMPLE MASTER TRANSMISSION SLAVE RESPONSE PACKET FORMAT EXAMPLE HEX PACKET FORMAT EXAMPLE HEX SLAVE ADDRESS 11 SLAVE ADDRESS 11 FUNCTION CODE 05 FUNCTION CODE 05 OPERATION CODE high 00 OPERATION CODE high 00 OPERATION CODE low 01 OPERATION CODE low 01 CODE VALUE high FF CODE VALUE high F...

Страница 544: ...the function code set to 1 The following table shows the format of the master and slave packets in Modbus RTU Modbus TCP IP ADUs have a MBAP instead of slave address and CRC is in another stack layer The example shows a master device sending the unsupported function code 39h to slave device 11h Table B 8 MASTER AND SLAVE DEVICE PACKET TRANSMISSION EXAMPLE MASTER TRANSMISSION SLAVE RESPONSE PACKET ...

Страница 545: ...etains connection specific file transfer information so files may be read simultaneously on multiple Modbus connections b OTHER PROTOCOLS All the files available via Modbus may also be retrieved using the standard file transfer mechanisms in other protocols for example TFTP or MMS c COMTRADE OSCILLOGRAPHY AND DATA LOGGER FILES Oscillography and data logger files are formatted using the COMTRADE fi...

Страница 546: ...e following to the filename before writing it To read from a specific time to the end of the log space startTime To read a specific range of records space startTime space endTime Replace startTime and endTime with Julian dates seconds since Jan 1 1970 as numeric text f READING EVENT RECORDER FILES To read the entire event recorder contents in ASCII format the only available format use the followin...

Страница 547: ...dule Serial Number 8 items F203 none Self Test Targets Read Only 0200 Self Test States 2 items 0 to 4294967295 0 1 F143 0 Front Panel Read Only 0204 LED Column n State n 1 to 10 10 items 0 to 65535 1 F501 0 0220 Display Message F204 none 0248 Last Key Pressed 0 to 47 1 F530 0 None Keypress Emulation Read Write 0280 Simulated keypress write zero before each keystroke 0 to 46 1 F190 0 No key use bet...

Страница 548: ...108 0 Off 042E Virtual Input 47 State 0 to 1 1 F108 0 Off 042F Virtual Input 48 State 0 to 1 1 F108 0 Off 0430 Virtual Input 49 State 0 to 1 1 F108 0 Off 0431 Virtual Input 50 State 0 to 1 1 F108 0 Off 0432 Virtual Input 51 State 0 to 1 1 F108 0 Off 0433 Virtual Input 52 State 0 to 1 1 F108 0 Off 0434 Virtual Input 53 State 0 to 1 1 F108 0 Off 0435 Virtual Input 54 State 0 to 1 1 F108 0 Off 0436 V...

Страница 549: ...mote Double Point Status Input 1 State 0 to 3 1 F605 3 Bad 1552 Remote Double Point Status Input 2 State 0 to 3 1 F605 3 Bad 1553 Remote Double Point Status Input 3 State 0 to 3 1 F605 3 Bad 1554 Remote Double Point Status Input 4 State 0 to 3 1 F605 3 Bad 1555 Remote Double Point Status Input 5 State 0 to 3 1 F605 3 Bad Platform Direct Input Output States Read Only 15C0 Direct Input States 6 item...

Страница 550: ...C Repeated for Restricted Ground Fault 4 16B0 Repeated for Restricted Ground Fault 5 16B4 Repeated for Restricted Ground Fault 6 Field Unit RTD Actuals Read Only 8 modules 16C0 Field RTD 1 Value 32768 to 32767 C 1 F002 0 16C1 Repeated for Field RTD 2 16C2 Repeated for Field RTD 3 16C3 Repeated for Field RTD 4 16C4 Repeated for Field RTD 5 16C5 Repeated for Field RTD 6 16C6 Repeated for Field RTD 7...

Страница 551: ...99999 999 V 0 001 F060 0 1A0B Source 1 Phase BG Voltage Angle 359 9 to 0 degrees 0 1 F002 0 1A0C Source 1 Phase CG Voltage Magnitude 0 to 999999 999 V 0 001 F060 0 1A0E Source 1 Phase CG Voltage Angle 359 9 to 0 degrees 0 1 F002 0 1A0F Source 1 Phase AB or AC Voltage RMS 0 to 999999 999 V 0 001 F060 0 1A11 Source 1 Phase BC or BA Voltage RMS 0 to 999999 999 V 0 001 F060 0 1A13 Source 1 Phase CA or...

Страница 552: ... 0 1C1A Source 1 Phase B Power Factor 0 999 to 1 0 001 F013 0 1C1B Source 1 Phase C Power Factor 0 999 to 1 0 001 F013 0 1C1C Reserved 4 items F001 0 1C20 Repeated for Source 2 1C40 Repeated for Source 3 1C60 Repeated for Source 4 1C80 Repeated for Source 5 1CA0 Repeated for Source 6 Source Energy Metering Read Only Non Volatile 6 modules 1D00 Source 1 Positive Watthour 0 to 1000000000000 Wh 0 001...

Страница 553: ...6 Breaker Flashover Read Write Setting 2 modules 21A6 Breaker Flashover 1 Function 0 to 1 1 F102 0 Disabled 21A7 Breaker Flashover 1 Side 1 Source 0 to 5 1 F167 0 SRC 1 21A8 Breaker Flashover 1 Side 2 Source 0 to 6 1 F211 0 None 21A9 Breaker Flashover 1 Status Closed A 0 to 65535 1 F300 0 21AA Breaker Flashover 1 Status Closed B 0 to 65535 1 F300 0 21AB Breaker Flashover 1 Status Closed C 0 to 655...

Страница 554: ...Phasor Ibr Angle 359 9 to 0 degrees 0 1 F002 0 230D Transformer Differential 2nd Harm Ibd Magnitude 0 to 999 9 fo 0 1 F001 0 230E Transformer Differential 2nd Harm Ibd Angle 359 9 to 0 degrees 0 1 F002 0 230F Transformer Differential 5th Harm Ibd Magnitude 0 to 999 9 fo 0 1 F001 0 2310 Transformer Differential 5th Harm Ibd Angle 359 9 to 0 degrees 0 1 F002 0 2311 Transformer Differential Phasor Ic...

Страница 555: ...1 F060 0 2563 PMU 1 Positive Sequence Current Angle 180 to 180 0 01 F002 0 2564 PMU 1 Negative Sequence Current Magnitude 0 to 999999 999 A 0 001 F060 0 2566 PMU 1 Negative Sequence Current Angle 180 to 180 0 01 F002 0 2567 PMU 1 Zero Sequence Current Magnitude 0 to 999999 999 A 0 001 F060 0 2569 PMU 1 Zero Sequence Current Angle 180 to 180 0 01 F002 0 256A PMU 1 Frequency 2 to 90 Hz 0 001 F003 0 ...

Страница 556: ... 0 270C IEC 61850 Received uinteger 15 0 to 4294967295 1 F003 0 270E IEC 61850 Received uinteger 16 0 to 4294967295 1 F003 0 Source Current THD and Harmonics Read Only 6 modules 2800 Ia THD for Source 1 0 to 99 9 0 1 F001 0 2801 Ia Harmonics for Source 1 2nd to 25th 24 items 0 to 99 9 0 1 F001 0 2821 Ib THD for Source 1 0 to 99 9 0 1 F001 0 2822 Ib Harmonics for Source 1 2nd to 25th 24 items 0 to ...

Страница 557: ...t Recorder Last Cleared Date 0 to 4294967295 1 F050 0 Event Recorder Commands Read Write Command 3406 Event Recorder Clear Command 0 to 1 1 F126 0 No DCmA Input Values Read Only 24 modules 34C0 DCmA Inputs 1 Value 9999 999 to 9999 999 0 001 F004 0 34C2 DCmA Inputs 2 Value 9999 999 to 9999 999 0 001 F004 0 34C4 DCmA Inputs 3 Value 9999 999 to 9999 999 0 001 F004 0 34C6 DCmA Inputs 4 Value 9999 999 ...

Страница 558: ...68 to 32767 C 1 F002 0 3507 RTD Input 24 Value 32768 to 32767 C 1 F002 0 3508 RTD Input 25 Value 32768 to 32767 C 1 F002 0 3509 RTD Input 26 Value 32768 to 32767 C 1 F002 0 350A RTD Input 27 Value 32768 to 32767 C 1 F002 0 350B RTD Input 28 Value 32768 to 32767 C 1 F002 0 350C RTD Input 29 Value 32768 to 32767 C 1 F002 0 350D RTD Input 30 Value 32768 to 32767 C 1 F002 0 350E RTD Input 31 Value 327...

Страница 559: ... Read Write Setting 6 modules 3890 Remote Phase CT x Origin 1 0 to 16 1 F247 0 None 3891 Remote Phase CT x Origin 2 0 to 16 1 F247 0 None 3892 Remote Ground CT x Origin 1 0 to 16 1 F248 0 None 3893 Remote Ground CT x Origin 2 0 to 16 1 F248 0 None 3894 AC Bank Redundancy Type 0 to 2 1 F261 1 Dependability Biased 3895 Remote Phase CT 1 Primary 1 to 65000 1 F001 1 3896 Remote Phase CT 1 Secondary 0 ...

Страница 560: ...d Contact Input 27 3A29 Repeated for Field Contact Input 28 3A34 Repeated for Field Contact Input 29 3A3F Repeated for Field Contact Input 30 3A4A Repeated for Field Contact Input 31 3A55 Repeated for Field Contact Input 32 3A60 Repeated for Field Contact Input 33 3A6B Repeated for Field Contact Input 34 3A76 Repeated for Field Contact Input 35 3A81 Repeated for Field Contact Input 36 3A8C Repeate...

Страница 561: ...ing Output 2 3D76 Repeated for Field Latching Output 3 3D81 Repeated for Field Latching Output 4 3D8C Repeated for Field Latching Output 5 3D97 Repeated for Field Latching Output 6 3DA2 Repeated for Field Latching Output 7 3DAD Repeated for Field Latching Output 8 Field Unit Shared Outputs Read Write Setting 16 modules 3DC0 Field Shared Output 1 ID 0 to 65535 1 F205 SO 1 3DC6 Field Shared Output 1...

Страница 562: ...ted for Field Unit Transducer 8 Field Unit Identifiers Read Only 8 modules 3F80 Attached Field Unit 1 Serial Number 1 F205 none 3F86 Attached Filed Unit 1 Port Number 1 F001 0 3F87 Attached Field Unit 1 Type 0 to 3 1 F243 0 CC 05 3F88 Field Unit 1 Status 0 to 4 1 F262 0 Disabled 3F89 Repeated for Field Unit 2 3F92 Repeated for Field Unit 3 3F9B Repeated for Field Unit 4 3FA4 Repeated for Field Uni...

Страница 563: ...00 4086 RS485 Com2 Parity 0 to 2 1 F113 0 None 4087 IP Address 0 to 4294967295 1 F003 56554706 4089 IP Subnet Mask 0 to 4294967295 1 F003 4294966272 408B Gateway IP Address 0 to 4294967295 1 F003 56554497 408D Network Address NSAP F074 0 409A DNP Channel 1 Port 0 to 5 1 F177 0 None 409B DNP Channel 2 Port 0 to 5 1 F177 0 None 409C DNP Address 0 to 65519 1 F001 1 409E DNP Client Addresses 2 items 0...

Страница 564: ...4 Client Address 5 items 0 to 4294967295 1 F003 0 4104 IEC 60870 5 104 Redundancy Port Enabled Disabled 0 to 1 1 F126 0 No 4105 IEC Communications Reserved 57 items 0 to 1 1 F001 0 413E High Enet Traffic Function 0 to 1 1 F102 0 Disabled 413F High Enet Traffic Events 0 to 1 1 F102 0 Disabled 4140 DNP Object 1 Default Variation 1 to 2 1 F001 2 4141 DNP Object 2 Default Variation 1 to 3 1 F001 2 414...

Страница 565: ...7 0 January 41AF Daylight Savings Time DST Stop Day 0 to 6 1 F238 0 Sunday 41B0 Daylight Savings Time DST Stop Day Instance 0 to 4 1 F239 0 First 41B1 Daylight Savings Time DST Stop Hour 0 to 23 1 F001 2 Oscillography Read Write Setting 41C0 Oscillography Number of Records 1 to 64 1 F001 5 41C1 Oscillography Trigger Mode 0 to 1 1 F118 0 Auto Overwrite 41C2 Oscillography Trigger Position 0 to 100 1...

Страница 566: ...eated for User Programmable LED 42 42D4 Repeated for User Programmable LED 43 42D6 Repeated for User Programmable LED 44 42D8 Repeated for User Programmable LED 45 42DA Repeated for User Programmable LED 46 42DC Repeated for User Programmable LED 47 42DE Repeated for User Programmable LED 48 Installation Read Write Setting 43E0 Relay Programmed State 0 to 1 1 F133 0 Not Programmed 43E1 Relay Name ...

Страница 567: ...uency Tracking Function 0 to 1 1 F102 1 Enabled Transformer General Read Write Setting 4630 Transformer Number of Windings 2 to 6 1 F001 2 4631 Transformer Phase Compensation 0 to 1 1 F160 0 Internal software 4632 Transformer Load Loss at Rated Load 1 to 20000 kW 1 F001 100 4633 Transformer Rated Winding Temperature Rise 0 to 4 1 F161 1 65 C oil 4634 Transformer No Load Loss 1 to 20000 kW 1 F001 1...

Страница 568: ...0 4719 Repeated for Breaker 2 4732 Repeated for Breaker 3 474B Repeated for Breaker 4 4764 Repeated for Breaker 5 477D Repeated for Breaker 6 Synchrocheck Read Write Setting 2 modules 47A0 Synchrocheck 1 Function 0 to 1 1 F102 0 Disabled 47A1 Synchrocheck 1 V1 Source 0 to 5 1 F167 0 SRC 1 47A2 Synchrocheck 1 V2 Source 0 to 5 1 F167 1 SRC 2 47A3 Synchrocheck 1 Maximum Voltage Difference 0 to 400000...

Страница 569: ...Field Data AC1 Mag 0 to 0 001 A 0 001 F003 0 4E02 Raw Field Data AC1 Angle 0 to 0 1 degree 0 1 F002 0 4E03 Raw Field Data AC2 Mag 0 to 0 001 A 0 001 F003 0 4E05 Raw Field Data AC2 Angle 0 to 0 1 degree 0 1 F002 0 4E06 Raw Field Data AC3 Mag 0 to 0 001 A 0 001 F003 0 4E08 Raw Field Data AC3 Angle 0 to 0 01 degree 0 1 F002 0 4E09 Raw Field Data AC4 Mag 0 to 0 001 A 0 001 F003 0 4E0B Raw Field Data A...

Страница 570: ...TD Input 1 ID F205 RTD Ip 1 5407 RTD Input 1 Type 0 to 3 1 F174 0 100 ohm Platinum 5413 Repeated for RTD Input 2 5426 Repeated for RTD Input 3 5439 Repeated for RTD Input 4 544C Repeated for RTD Input 5 545F Repeated for RTD Input 6 5472 Repeated for RTD Input 7 5485 Repeated for RTD Input 8 5498 Repeated for RTD Input 9 54AB Repeated for RTD Input 10 54BE Repeated for RTD Input 11 54D1 Repeated f...

Страница 571: ...840 Repeated for FlexLogic Timer 9 5848 Repeated for FlexLogic Timer 10 5850 Repeated for FlexLogic Timer 11 5858 Repeated for FlexLogic Timer 12 5860 Repeated for FlexLogic Timer 13 5868 Repeated for FlexLogic Timer 14 5870 Repeated for FlexLogic Timer 15 5878 Repeated for FlexLogic Timer 16 5880 Repeated for FlexLogic Timer 17 5888 Repeated for FlexLogic Timer 18 5890 Repeated for FlexLogic Time...

Страница 572: ...nstantaneous Overcurrent 1 Events 0 to 1 1 F102 0 Disabled 5A0A Reserved 6 items 0 to 1 1 F001 0 5A10 Repeated for Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent 2 5A20 Repeated for Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent 3 5A30 Repeated for Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent 4 5A40 Repeated for Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent 5 5A50 Repeated for Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent 6 5A60 Repeated for Phase Instantaneous Overc...

Страница 573: ...22 0 Phasor 5D03 Ground Time Overcurrent 1 Pickup 0 to 30 pu 0 001 F001 1000 5D04 Ground Time Overcurrent 1 Curve 0 to 16 1 F103 0 IEEE Mod Inv 5D05 Ground Time Overcurrent 1 Multiplier 0 to 600 0 01 F001 100 5D06 Ground Time Overcurrent 1 Reset 0 to 1 1 F104 0 Instantaneous 5D07 Ground Time Overcurrent 1 Block 0 to 65535 1 F300 0 5D08 Ground Time Overcurrent 1 Target 0 to 2 1 F109 0 Self reset 5D...

Страница 574: ...nsformer Aging Factor Read Write Grouped Setting 6150 Transformer Aging Factor Function 0 to 1 1 F102 0 Disabled 6151 Transformer Aging Factor Pickup 1 to 10 PU 0 1 F001 20 6152 Transformer Aging Factor Delay 0 to 30000 min 1 F001 10 6153 Transformer Aging Factor Block 0 to 65535 1 F300 0 6154 Transformer Aging Factor Target 0 to 2 1 F109 0 Self reset 6155 Transformer Aging Factor Events 0 to 1 1 ...

Страница 575: ...ock 0 to 65535 1 F300 0 6223 Transformer Instantaneous Differential Target 0 to 2 1 F109 0 Self reset 6224 Transformer Instantaneous Differential Events 0 to 1 1 F102 0 Disabled Overfrequency Read Write Setting 4 modules 64D0 Overfrequency 1 Function 0 to 1 1 F102 0 Disabled 64D1 Overfrequency 1 Block 0 to 65535 1 F300 0 64D2 Overfrequency 1 Source 0 to 5 1 F167 0 SRC 1 64D3 Overfrequency 1 Pickup...

Страница 576: ...ncroachment Reach 0 02 to 250 ohms 0 01 F001 100 6704 Load Encroachment Angle 5 to 50 degrees 1 F001 30 6705 Load Encroachment Pickup Delay 0 to 65 535 s 0 001 F001 0 6706 Load Encroachment Reset Delay 0 to 65 535 s 0 001 F001 0 6707 Load Encroachment Block 0 to 65535 1 F300 0 6708 Load Encroachment Target 0 to 2 1 F109 0 Self reset 6709 Load Encroachment Events 0 to 1 1 F102 0 Disabled 670A Reser...

Страница 577: ...age Connection 0 to 12 1 F153 0 None 7083 Phase Distance Zone 1 Transformer Current Connection 0 to 12 1 F153 0 None 7084 Phase Distance Zone 1 Rev Reach 0 02 to 500 ohms 0 01 F001 200 7085 Phase Distance Zone 1 Rev Reach RCA 30 to 90 degrees 1 F001 85 7086 Reserved 10 items F001 0 7090 Repeated for Phase Distance Zone 2 70B0 Repeated for Phase Distance Zone 3 Ground Distance Read Write Grouped Se...

Страница 578: ...ees 1 F001 90 7285 Neutral Directional Overcurrent 1 Forward Pickup 0 006 to 30 pu 0 001 F001 50 7286 Neutral Directional Overcurrent 1 Reverse Limit Angle 40 to 90 degrees 1 F001 90 7287 Neutral Directional Overcurrent 1 Reverse Pickup 0 006 to 30 pu 0 001 F001 50 7288 Neutral Directional Overcurrent 1 Target 0 to 2 1 F109 0 Self reset 7289 Neutral Directional Overcurrent 1 Block 0 to 65535 1 F30...

Страница 579: ...540 Disconnect Switch 1 Function 0 to 1 1 F102 0 Disabled 7541 Disconnect Switch 1 Name F206 SW 1 7544 Disconnect Switch 1 Mode 0 to 1 1 F157 0 3 Pole 7545 Disconnect Switch 1 Open 0 to 65535 1 F300 0 7546 Disconnect Switch 1 Block Open 0 to 65535 1 F300 0 7547 Disconnect Switch 1 Close 0 to 65535 1 F300 0 7548 Disconnect Switch 1 Block Close 0 to 65535 1 F300 0 7549 Disconnect Switch 1 Phase A Th...

Страница 580: ...to 1 1 F102 0 Disabled 7743 Reserved 2 items F001 0 7745 Repeated for Thermal Protection 2 Ohm Inputs Read Write Setting 2 modules 7840 Ohm Inputs 1 Function 0 to 1 1 F102 0 Disabled 7841 Ohm Inputs 1 ID F205 Ohm Ip 1 7847 Ohm Inputs 1 Reserved 9 items 0 to 65535 1 F001 0 7850 Repeated for Ohm Inputs 2 Phasor Measurement Unit Power Trigger Read Write Setting 7860 PMU 1 Power Trigger Function 0 to ...

Страница 581: ...MU 1 Test df dt 10 to 10 Hz s 0 001 F002 0 Phasor Measurement Unit Recorder Configuration Counter Command Read Write Command 7928 PMU 1 Recorder Clear Configuration Counter 0 to 1 1 F126 0 No Phasor Measurement Unit Recording Values Read Only 792C PMU 1 Available Records 0 to 65535 1 F001 0 792D PMU 1 Second Per Record 0 to 6553 5 0 1 F003 0 792F PMU 1 Last Cleared Date 0 to 400000000 1 F050 0 Pha...

Страница 582: ... Pushbutton 1 On Text F202 none 7B75 User Programmable Pushbutton 1 Off Text F202 none 7B7F User Programmable Pushbutton 1 Drop Out Time 0 to 60 s 0 05 F001 0 7B80 User Programmable Pushbutton 1 Target 0 to 2 1 F109 0 Self reset 7B81 User Programmable Pushbutton 1 Events 0 to 1 1 F102 0 Disabled 7B82 User Programmable Pushbutton 1 LED Operand 0 to 65535 1 F300 0 7B83 User Programmable Pushbutton 1...

Страница 583: ...te Time 7F09 Reserved 7 items 0 to 65535 1 F001 0 7F10 Repeated for Neutral Overvoltage 2 7F20 Repeated for Neutral Overvoltage 3 Auxiliary Overvoltage Read Write Grouped Setting 3 modules 7F30 Auxiliary Overvoltage 1 Function 0 to 1 1 F102 0 Disabled 7F31 Auxiliary Overvoltage 1 Signal Source 0 to 5 1 F167 0 SRC 1 7F32 Auxiliary Overvoltage 1 Pickup 0 to 3 pu 0 001 F001 300 7F33 Auxiliary Overvol...

Страница 584: ...em 1 20 items 0 to 65535 1 F001 0 8418 Reserved 80 items F001 0 EGD Slow Production Read Write Setting 2 modules 8468 EGD Slow Producer Exchange 1 Function 0 to 1 1 F102 0 Disabled 8469 EGD Fast Producer Exchange 1 Destination 0 to 4294967295 1 F003 0 846B EGD Slow Producer Exchange 1 Data Rate 500 to 1000 ms 50 F001 1000 846C EGD Slow Producer Exchange 1 Data Item 1 50 items 0 to 65535 1 F001 0 8...

Страница 585: ...102 0 Disabled 86D1 Remote RTD 1 ID F205 RRTD 1 86D7 Remote RTD 1 Type 0 to 3 1 F174 0 100 Ohm Platinum 86D8 Remote RTD 1 Application 0 to 5 1 F550 0 None 86D9 Remote RTD 1 Alarm Temperature 1 to 200 C 1 F001 130 86DA Remote RTD 1 Alarm Pickup Delay 5 to 600 seconds 5 F001 5 86DB Remote RTD 1 Trip Temperature 1 to 200 C 1 F001 130 86DC Remote RTD 1 Trip Pickup Delay 5 to 600 seconds 5 F001 5 86DD ...

Страница 586: ...r Digital Element 5 8A64 Repeated for Digital Element 6 8A78 Repeated for Digital Element 7 8A8C Repeated for Digital Element 8 8AA0 Repeated for Digital Element 9 8AB4 Repeated for Digital Element 10 8AC8 Repeated for Digital Element 11 8ADC Repeated for Digital Element 12 8AF0 Repeated for Digital Element 13 8B04 Repeated for Digital Element 14 8B18 Repeated for Digital Element 15 8B2C Repeated ...

Страница 587: ...0 0 to 65535 1 F300 0 8E0E Trip Bus 1 Input 11 0 to 65535 1 F300 0 8E0F Trip Bus 1 Input 12 0 to 65535 1 F300 0 8E10 Trip Bus 1 Input 13 0 to 65535 1 F300 0 8E11 Trip Bus 1 Input 14 0 to 65535 1 F300 0 8E12 Trip Bus 1 Input 15 0 to 65535 1 F300 0 8E13 Trip Bus 1 Input 16 0 to 65535 1 F300 0 8E14 Trip Bus 1 Latching 0 to 1 1 F102 0 Disabled 8E15 Trip Bus 1 Reset 0 to 65535 1 F300 0 8E16 Trip Bus 1 ...

Страница 588: ...m 90 to 90 pu 0 001 F004 0 9304 DCmA Output 1 Maximum 90 to 90 pu 0 001 F004 1000 9306 Repeated for DCmA Output 2 930C Repeated for DCmA Output 3 9312 Repeated for DCmA Output 4 9318 Repeated for DCmA Output 5 931E Repeated for DCmA Output 6 9324 Repeated for DCmA Output 7 932A Repeated for DCmA Output 8 9330 Repeated for DCmA Output 9 9336 Repeated for DCmA Output 10 933C Repeated for DCmA Output...

Страница 589: ...Read Write Setting Registers 16 modules 9910 IEC 61850 GOOSE uinteger 1 Default Value 0 to 429496295 1 F003 1000 9912 IEC 61850 GOOSE uinteger Input 1 Mode 0 to 1 1 F491 0 Default Value 9913 Repeated for IEC61850 GOOSE uinteger 2 9916 Repeated for IEC61850 GOOSE uinteger 3 9919 Repeated for IEC61850 GOOSE uinteger 4 991C Repeated for IEC61850 GOOSE uinteger 5 991F Repeated for IEC61850 GOOSE uinte...

Страница 590: ... Teleprotection Function 0 to 1 1 F102 0 Disabled 9B01 Teleprotection Number of Terminals 2 to 3 1 F001 2 9B02 Teleprotection Number of Channels 1 to 2 1 F001 1 9B03 Teleprotection Local Relay ID 0 to 255 1 F001 0 9B04 Teleprotection Terminal 1 ID 0 to 255 1 F001 0 9B05 Teleprotection Terminal 2 ID 0 to 255 1 F001 0 9B06 Reserved 10 items 0 to 1 1 F001 0 9B10 Teleprotection Input 1 n Default State...

Страница 591: ... 0 A286 Selector 1 Bit0 0 to 65535 1 F300 0 A287 Selector 1 Bit1 0 to 65535 1 F300 0 A288 Selector 1 Bit2 0 to 65535 1 F300 0 A289 Selector 1 Bit Mode 0 to 1 1 F083 0 Time out A28A Selector 1 Bit Acknowledge 0 to 65535 1 F300 0 A28B Selector 1 Power Up Mode 0 to 2 1 F084 0 Restore A28C Selector 1 Target 0 to 2 1 F109 0 Self reset A28D Selector 1 Events 0 to 1 1 F102 0 Disabled A28E Reserved 10 ite...

Страница 592: ...Latch 16 Digital Counter Read Write Setting 8 modules A800 Digital Counter 1 Function 0 to 1 1 F102 0 Disabled A801 Digital Counter 1 Name F205 Counter 1 A807 Digital Counter 1 Units F206 none A80A Digital Counter 1 Block 0 to 65535 1 F300 0 A80B Digital Counter 1 Up 0 to 65535 1 F300 0 A80C Digital Counter 1 Down 0 to 65535 1 F300 0 A80D Digital Counter 1 Preset 2147483647 to 2147483647 1 F004 0 ...

Страница 593: ...nput 13 AA5B Repeated for IEC 61850 GOOSE Analog Input 14 AA62 Repeated for IEC 61850 GOOSE Analog Input 15 AA69 Repeated for IEC 61850 GOOSE Analog Input 16 AA70 Repeated for IEC 61850 GOOSE Analog Input 17 AA77 Repeated for IEC 61850 GOOSE Analog Input 18 AA7E Repeated for IEC 61850 GOOSE Analog Input 19 AA85 Repeated for IEC 61850 GOOSE Analog Input 20 AA8C Repeated for IEC 61850 GOOSE Analog I...

Страница 594: ...1850 Logical Node PDIFx Name Prefix 4 items 0 to 65534 1 F206 none AD73 IEC 61850 Logical Node MMXNx Name Prefix 37 items 0 to 65534 1 F206 none ADE2 IEC 61850 Logical Node CSWIx Name Prefix 30 items 0 to 65534 1 F206 none AE3C IEC 61850 Logical Node XSWIx Name Prefix 24 items 0 to 65534 1 F206 none IEC 61850 XSWI Configuration Read Write Settings and Commands 24 modules AECF FlexLogic Operand for...

Страница 595: ...50 GGIO4 Analog Input 23 AFB1 Repeated for IEC 61850 GGIO4 Analog Input 24 AFB8 Repeated for IEC 61850 GGIO4 Analog Input 25 AFBF Repeated for IEC 61850 GGIO4 Analog Input 26 AFC6 Repeated for IEC 61850 GGIO4 Analog Input 27 AFCD Repeated for IEC 61850 GGIO4 Analog Input 28 AFD4 Repeated for IEC 61850 GGIO4 Analog Input 29 AFDB Repeated for IEC 61850 GGIO4 Analog Input 30 AFE2 Repeated for IEC 618...

Страница 596: ...0E4 IEC 61850 MMXU VAr phsA Deadband 1 0 001 to 100 0 001 F003 10000 B0E6 IEC 61850 MMXU VAr phsB Deadband 1 0 001 to 100 0 001 F003 10000 B0E8 IEC 61850 MMXU VAr phsC Deadband 1 0 001 to 100 0 001 F003 10000 B0EA IEC 61850 MMXU VA phsA Deadband 1 0 001 to 100 0 001 F003 10000 B0EC IEC 61850 MMXU VA phsB Deadband 1 0 001 to 100 0 001 F003 10000 B0EE IEC 61850 MMXU VA phsC Deadband 1 0 001 to 100 0...

Страница 597: ... GOOSEOut_x_ B5C2 Configurable GOOSE Destination MAC Address F072 0 B5C5 IEC 61850 Configurable GOOSE VLAN Transmit Priority 0 to 7 1 F001 4 B5C6 IEC 61850 Configurable GOOSE VLAN ID 0 to 4095 1 F001 0 B5C7 IEC 61850 Configurable GOOSE ETYPE APPID 0 to 16383 1 F001 0 B5C8 IEC 61850 Configurable GOOSE ConfRev Configuration Revision 1 to 4294967295 1 F003 1 B5CA IEC 61850 Configurable GOOSE Retransm...

Страница 598: ...nput 19 BB98 Repeated for Contact Input 20 BBA0 Repeated for Contact Input 21 BBA8 Repeated for Contact Input 22 BBB0 Repeated for Contact Input 23 BBB8 Repeated for Contact Input 24 BBC0 Repeated for Contact Input 25 BBC8 Repeated for Contact Input 26 BBD0 Repeated for Contact Input 27 BBD8 Repeated for Contact Input 28 BBE0 Repeated for Contact Input 29 BBE8 Repeated for Contact Input 30 BBF0 Re...

Страница 599: ...8 Repeated for Contact Input 76 BD60 Repeated for Contact Input 77 BD68 Repeated for Contact Input 78 BD70 Repeated for Contact Input 79 BD78 Repeated for Contact Input 80 BD80 Repeated for Contact Input 81 BD88 Repeated for Contact Input 82 BD90 Repeated for Contact Input 83 BD98 Repeated for Contact Input 84 BDA0 Repeated for Contact Input 85 BDA8 Repeated for Contact Input 86 BDB0 Repeated for ...

Страница 600: ... Virtual Input 25 BF5C Repeated for Virtual Input 26 BF68 Repeated for Virtual Input 27 BF74 Repeated for Virtual Input 28 BF80 Repeated for Virtual Input 29 BF8C Repeated for Virtual Input 30 BF98 Repeated for Virtual Input 31 BFA4 Repeated for Virtual Input 32 BFB0 Repeated for Virtual Input 33 BFBC Repeated for Virtual Input 34 BFC8 Repeated for Virtual Input 35 BFD4 Repeated for Virtual Input ...

Страница 601: ... Repeated for Virtual Output 12 C190 Repeated for Virtual Output 13 C198 Repeated for Virtual Output 14 C1A0 Repeated for Virtual Output 15 C1A8 Repeated for Virtual Output 16 C1B0 Repeated for Virtual Output 17 C1B8 Repeated for Virtual Output 18 C1C0 Repeated for Virtual Output 19 C1C8 Repeated for Virtual Output 20 C1D0 Repeated for Virtual Output 21 C1D8 Repeated for Virtual Output 22 C1E0 Rep...

Страница 602: ... for Virtual Output 66 C340 Repeated for Virtual Output 67 C348 Repeated for Virtual Output 68 C350 Repeated for Virtual Output 69 C358 Repeated for Virtual Output 70 C360 Repeated for Virtual Output 71 C368 Repeated for Virtual Output 72 C370 Repeated for Virtual Output 73 C378 Repeated for Virtual Output 74 C380 Repeated for Virtual Output 75 C388 Repeated for Virtual Output 76 C390 Repeated for...

Страница 603: ...ed for Contact Output 6 C488 Repeated for Contact Output 7 C494 Repeated for Contact Output 8 C4A0 Repeated for Contact Output 9 C4AC Repeated for Contact Output 10 C4B8 Repeated for Contact Output 11 C4C4 Repeated for Contact Output 12 C4D0 Repeated for Contact Output 13 C4DC Repeated for Contact Output 14 C4E8 Repeated for Contact Output 15 C4F4 Repeated for Contact Output 16 C500 Repeated for C...

Страница 604: ...uttons Read Write Setting 7 modules C760 Control Pushbutton 1 Function 0 to 1 1 F102 0 Disabled C761 Control Pushbutton 1 Events 0 to 1 1 F102 0 Disabled C762 Repeated for Control Pushbutton 2 C764 Repeated for Control Pushbutton 3 C766 Repeated for Control Pushbutton 4 C768 Repeated for Control Pushbutton 5 C76A Repeated for Control Pushbutton 6 C76C Repeated for Control Pushbutton 7 Clear Record...

Страница 605: ...Direct Input 8 C8B0 Repeated for Direct Input 9 C8B4 Repeated for Direct Input 10 C8B8 Repeated for Direct Input 11 C8BC Repeated for Direct Input 12 C8C0 Repeated for Direct Input 13 C8C4 Repeated for Direct Input 14 C8C8 Repeated for Direct Input 15 C8CC Repeated for Direct Input 16 C8D0 Repeated for Direct Input 17 C8D4 Repeated for Direct Input 18 C8D8 Repeated for Direct Input 19 C8DC Repeate...

Страница 606: ...Alarm Events 0 to 1 1 F102 0 Disabled CAD4 Reserved 4 items 1 to 1000 1 F001 10 CAD8 Direct Input Output Channel 2 CRC Alarm Function 0 to 1 1 F102 0 Disabled CAD9 Direct Input Output Channel 2 CRC Alarm Message Count 100 to 10000 1 F001 600 CADA Direct Input Output Channel 2 CRC Alarm Threshold 1 to 1000 1 F001 10 CADB Direct Input Output Channel 2 CRC Alarm Events 0 to 1 1 F102 0 Disabled CADC R...

Страница 607: ...Name 1 to 64 1 F205 Rem Ip 1 CFAA Repeated for Remote Input 2 CFB4 Repeated for Remote Input 3 CFBE Repeated for Remote Input 4 CFC8 Repeated for Remote Input 5 CFD2 Repeated for Remote Input 6 CFDC Repeated for Remote Input 7 CFE6 Repeated for Remote Input 8 CFF0 Repeated for Remote Input 9 CFFA Repeated for Remote Input 10 D004 Repeated for Remote Input 11 D00E Repeated for Remote Input 12 D018 ...

Страница 608: ...r Remote Output 21 D274 Repeated for Remote Output 22 D278 Repeated for Remote Output 23 D27C Repeated for Remote Output 24 D280 Repeated for Remote Output 25 D284 Repeated for Remote Output 26 D288 Repeated for Remote Output 27 D28C Repeated for Remote Output 28 D290 Repeated for Remote Output 29 D294 Repeated for Remote Output 30 D298 Repeated for Remote Output 31 D29C Repeated for Remote Output...

Страница 609: ...2 CF SPCSO12 ctlModel Value 0 to 2 1 F001 1 D32C IEC 61850 GGIO2 CF SPCSO13 ctlModel Value 0 to 2 1 F001 1 D32D IEC 61850 GGIO2 CF SPCSO14 ctlModel Value 0 to 2 1 F001 1 D32E IEC 61850 GGIO2 CF SPCSO15 ctlModel Value 0 to 2 1 F001 1 D32F IEC 61850 GGIO2 CF SPCSO16 ctlModel Value 0 to 2 1 F001 1 D330 IEC 61850 GGIO2 CF SPCSO17 ctlModel Value 0 to 2 1 F001 1 D331 IEC 61850 GGIO2 CF SPCSO18 ctlModel ...

Страница 610: ... ctlModel Value 0 to 2 1 F001 1 D35A IEC 61850 GGIO2 CF SPCSO59 ctlModel Value 0 to 2 1 F001 1 D35B IEC 61850 GGIO2 CF SPCSO60 ctlModel Value 0 to 2 1 F001 1 D35C IEC 61850 GGIO2 CF SPCSO61 ctlModel Value 0 to 2 1 F001 1 D35D IEC 61850 GGIO2 CF SPCSO62 ctlModel Value 0 to 2 1 F001 1 D35E IEC 61850 GGIO2 CF SPCSO63 ctlModel Value 0 to 2 1 F001 1 D35F IEC 61850 GGIO2 CF SPCSO64 ctlModel Value 0 to 2...

Страница 611: ...ecords 2 to 128 1 F001 10 E4DE PMU 1 Trigger Mode 0 to 1 1 F542 0 Auto Overwrite E4DF PMU 1 Timed Trigger Position 1 to 50 1 F001 10 E4E0 PMU 1 Record PHS 1 14 items 0 to 14 1 F543 1 Va E4EE PMU 1 Record PHS x Name 14 items F203 GE UR PMU PHS 1 E55E PMU 1 Record A CH x 8 items 0 to 65535 1 F600 0 E566 PMU 1 Record A CH x Name 8 items F203 AnalogChannel 1 E5A6 PMU 1 Record D CH x 16 items 0 to 6553...

Страница 612: ...s indicate leading F050 UR_UINT32 TIME and DATE UNSIGNED 32 BIT INTEGER Gives the current time in seconds elapsed since 00 00 00 January 1 1970 F051 UR_UINT32 DATE in SR format alternate format for F050 First 16 bits are Month Day MM DD xxxx Month 1 January 2 February 12 December Day 1 to 31 in steps of 1 Last 16 bits are Year xx xx YYYY 1970 to 2106 in steps of 1 F052 UR_UINT32 TIME in SR format ...

Страница 613: ...hort Inv 15 FlexCurve C 7 IAC Ext Inv 16 FlexCurve D 8 IAC Very Inv Bitmask Value Bitmask Value Bitmask Value 0 300 4 9600 8 115200 1 1200 5 19200 9 14400 2 2400 6 38400 10 28800 3 4800 7 57600 11 33600 Mask Value Mask Value Mask Value Mask Value 0 0 00 30 0 88 60 2 90 90 5 90 1 0 05 31 0 90 61 3 00 91 6 00 2 0 10 32 0 91 62 3 10 92 6 50 3 0 15 33 0 92 63 3 20 93 7 00 4 0 20 34 0 93 64 3 30 94 7 5...

Страница 614: ...al Time Overcurrent 2 50 Neutral Time Overcurrent 3 51 Neutral Time Overcurrent 4 52 Neutral Time Overcurrent 5 53 Neutral Time Overcurrent 6 56 Neutral Directional Overcurrent 1 64 Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 65 Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent 2 66 Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent 3 67 Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent 4 68 Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent 5 69 Ground Instantaneous Overcur...

Страница 615: ...tor switch 1 389 Selector switch 2 390 Control pushbutton 1 391 Control pushbutton 2 392 Control pushbutton 3 393 Control pushbutton 4 394 Control pushbutton 5 395 Control pushbutton 6 396 Control pushbutton 7 Bitmask Element 400 FlexElement 1 401 FlexElement 2 402 FlexElement 3 403 FlexElement 4 404 FlexElement 5 405 FlexElement 6 406 FlexElement 7 407 FlexElement 8 408 FlexElement 9 409 FlexElem...

Страница 616: ... Trip Bus 1 843 Trip Bus 2 844 Trip Bus 3 845 Trip Bus 4 846 Trip Bus 5 847 Trip Bus 6 849 RTD Input 1 850 RTD Input 2 851 RTD Input 3 852 RTD Input 4 853 RTD Input 5 854 RTD Input 6 Bitmask Element 855 RTD Input 7 856 RTD Input 8 857 RTD Input 9 858 RTD Input 10 859 RTD Input 11 860 RTD Input 12 861 RTD Input 13 862 RTD Input 14 863 RTD Input 15 864 RTD Input 16 865 RTD Input 17 866 RTD Input 18 ...

Страница 617: ...hbutton 15 915 User Programmable Pushbutton 16 920 Disconnect switch 1 921 Disconnect switch 2 922 Disconnect switch 3 923 Disconnect switch 4 924 Disconnect switch 5 925 Disconnect switch 6 926 Disconnect switch 7 927 Disconnect switch 8 928 Disconnect switch 9 929 Disconnect switch 10 930 Disconnect switch 11 931 Disconnect switch 12 932 Disconnect switch 13 933 Disconnect switch 14 934 Disconne...

Страница 618: ...or Error 31 Any Major Error 32 IEC 61850 Data Set 33 34 35 36 Watchdog Error 37 Low On Memory 38 43 Module Failure 01 44 Module Failure 02 45 Module Failure 03 46 Module Failure 04 47 Module Failure 05 48 Module Failure 06 49 Module Failure 07 50 Module Failure 08 51 Module Failure 09 52 Incompatible Hardware 53 Module Failure 10 54 Module Failure 11 55 Module Failure 12 Bitmask Error Bitmask Defi...

Страница 619: ...b 5 Vbc 6 Vca F167 ENUMERATION SIGNAL SOURCE 0 SRC 1 1 SRC 2 2 SRC 3 3 SRC 4 4 SRC 5 5 SRC 6 F168 ENUMERATION INRUSH INHIBIT FUNCTION 0 Disabled 1 Adapt 2nd 2 Trad 2nd Bitmask Type Bitmask Type Bitmask Type 0 None 5 Dy9 10 Yd7 1 Dy1 6 Dy11 11 Yd9 2 Dy3 7 Yd1 12 Yd11 3 Dy5 8 Yd3 4 Dy7 9 Yd5 Bitmask Value Bitmask Value 0 None 35 UserSt 3 1 DNA 1 36 UserSt 4 2 DNA 2 37 UserSt 5 3 DNA 3 38 UserSt 6 4 ...

Страница 620: ... MODE 0 Phase to Ground 1 Phase to Phase F189 ENUMERATION INRUSH INHIBIT MODE 0 Per Phase 1 2 out of 3 2 Average Bitmask Slot Bitmask Slot Bitmask Slot Bitmask Slot 0 F 4 K 8 P 12 U 1 G 5 L 9 R 13 V 2 H 6 M 10 S 14 W 3 J 7 N 11 T 15 X Bitmask DCmA input output range 0 0 to 1 mA 1 0 to 1 mA 2 1 to 1 mA 3 0 to 5 mA 4 0 to 10 mA 5 0 to 20 mA 6 4 to 20 mA Bitmask Synchrocheck dead source 0 None 1 LV1 ...

Страница 621: ...ER ASCII TEXT F220 ENUMERATION PUSHBUTTON MESSAGE PRIORITY F230 ENUMERATION DIRECTIONAL POLARIZING 0 Voltage 1 Current 2 Dual F231 ENUMERATION POLARIZING VOLTAGE 0 Calculated V0 1 Measured VX Bitmask Keypress Bitmask Keypress 0 No key use between real keys 23 Reset 24 User 1 1 1 25 User 2 2 2 26 User 3 3 3 27 User programmable key 1 4 4 28 User programmable key 2 5 5 29 User programmable key 3 6 6...

Страница 622: ... f 297 MMXU2 MX TotPF mag f 298 MMXU2 MX Hz mag f 299 MMXU2 MX PPV phsAB cVal mag f 300 MMXU2 MX PPV phsAB cVal ang f 301 MMXU2 MX PPV phsBC cVal mag f 302 MMXU2 MX PPV phsBC cVal ang f 303 MMXU2 MX PPV phsCA cVal mag f 304 MMXU2 MX PPV phsCA cVal ang f 305 MMXU2 MX PhV phsA cVal mag f 306 MMXU2 MX PhV phsA cVal ang f 307 MMXU2 MX PhV phsB cVal mag f 308 MMXU2 MX PhV phsB cVal ang f 309 MMXU2 MX P...

Страница 623: ... MX VA phsB cVal mag f 401 MMXU4 MX VA phsC cVal mag f 402 MMXU4 MX PF phsA cVal mag f 403 MMXU4 MX PF phsB cVal mag f Value IEC 61850 Tx dataset item 404 MMXU4 MX PF phsC cVal mag f 405 MMXU5 MX TotW mag f 406 MMXU5 MX TotVAr mag f 407 MMXU5 MX TotVA mag f 408 MMXU5 MX TotPF mag f 409 MMXU5 MX Hz mag f 410 MMXU5 MX PPV phsAB cVal mag f 411 MMXU5 MX PPV phsAB cVal ang f 412 MMXU5 MX PPV phsBC cVal...

Страница 624: ...ag f 498 GGIO4 MX AnIn20 mag f 499 GGIO4 MX AnIn21 mag f 500 GGIO4 MX AnIn22 mag f 501 GGIO4 MX AnIn23 mag f 502 GGIO4 MX AnIn24 mag f 503 GGIO4 MX AnIn25 mag f 504 GGIO4 MX AnIn26 mag f 505 GGIO4 MX AnIn27 mag f 506 GGIO4 MX AnIn28 mag f 507 GGIO4 MX AnIn29 mag f 508 GGIO4 MX AnIn30 mag f 509 GGIO4 MX AnIn31 mag f Value IEC 61850 Tx dataset item 510 GGIO4 MX AnIn32 mag f 511 GGIO5 ST UIntIn1 q 51...

Страница 625: ...O3 ST IndPos2 stVal 163 GGIO3 ST IndPos3 stVal 164 GGIO3 ST IndPos4 stVal 165 GGIO3 ST IndPos5 stVal 166 GGIO3 ST UIntIn1 q 167 GGIO3 ST UIntIn1 stVal 168 GGIO3 ST UIntIn2 q 169 GGIO3 ST UIntIn2 stVal 170 GGIO3 ST UIntIn3 q 171 GGIO3 ST UIntIn3 stVal 172 GGIO3 ST UIntIn4 q 173 GGIO3 ST UIntIn4 stVal 174 GGIO3 ST UIntIn5 q 175 GGIO3 ST UIntIn5 stVal 176 GGIO3 ST UIntIn6 q 177 GGIO3 ST UIntIn6 stVal...

Страница 626: ...TRANSDUCER ORIGIN F256 ENUMERATION BRICK ORIGIN DESTINATION 3 Fourth 4 Last Value Function 0 Disabled 1 Isolated 2 Forcible Value Description 0 5 5V 1 1 1mA 2 0 1mA 3 0 1mA 4 0 5mA 5 0 10mA 6 0 20mA 7 4 20mA 8 potentiometer 9 tap position Value Description 0 None 1 U1 AC1 3 2 U1 AC5 7 3 U2 AC1 3 4 U2 AC5 7 5 U3 AC1 3 Value Instance 6 U3 AC5 7 7 U4 AC1 3 8 U4 AC5 7 9 U5 AC1 3 10 U5 AC5 7 11 U6 AC1 ...

Страница 627: ...to 64 12 CONTACT OUTPUTS CURRENT DETECTED 1 to 64 13 CONTACT OUTPUTS CURRENT OFF DETECTED 1 to 64 14 REMOTE INPUTS 1 to 32 16 DIRECT INPUTS 1 to 96 18 REMOTE OUTPUT DNA BIT PAIRS 1 to 32 20 REMOTE OUTPUT UserSt BIT PAIRS 1 to 32 22 REMOTE DEVICE ONLINE 1 to 16 24 MISCELLANEOUS EQUATION 26 TELEPROTECTION INPUTS 28 INSERT via keypad only 30 DELETE via keypad only 32 END 34 NOT 1 INPUT 36 2 INPUT XOR...

Страница 628: ...s off 0 Off 1 On F502 BITFIELD ELEMENT OPERATE STATES Each bit contains the operate state for an element See the F124 format code for a list of element IDs The operate bit for element ID X is bit X mod 16 in register X 16 F513 ENUMERATION POWER SWING MODE 0 Two Step 1 Three Step F514 ENUMERATION POWER SWING TRIP MODE 0 Delayed 1 Early F515 ENUMERATION ELEMENT INPUT MODE 0 Signed 1 Absolute F516 EN...

Страница 629: ...lue used when this parameter is selected Only certain values can be used as FlexAn alogs basically all metering quantities used in protection Value Keypress Value Keypress Value Keypress 0 None 15 3 33 User PB 3 1 Menu 16 Enter 34 User PB 4 2 Message Up 17 Message Down 35 User PB 5 3 7 18 0 36 User PB 6 4 8 19 Decimal 37 User PB 7 5 9 20 38 User PB 8 6 Help 21 Value Up 39 User PB 9 7 Message Left ...

Страница 630: ...D 3 5 Remote RTD 4 6 Remote RTD 5 7 Remote RTD 6 8 Remote RTD 7 9 Remote RTD 8 10 Remote RTD 9 11 Remote RTD 10 12 Remote RTD 11 13 Remote RTD 12 Enumeration Remote DPS input status 0 Intermediate 1 Off 2 On 3 Bad Enumeration Remote double point status input 0 None 1 Remote input 1 2 Remote input 2 3 Remote input 3 64 Remote input 64 Enumeration Configurable GOOSE retransmission scheme 0 Heartbeat...

Страница 631: ... 73 PIOC23 ST Str general 74 PIOC23 ST Op general 75 PIOC24 ST Str general Enumeration IEC 61850 report dataset items 76 PIOC24 ST Op general 77 PIOC25 ST Str general 78 PIOC25 ST Op general 79 PIOC26 ST Str general 80 PIOC26 ST Op general 81 PIOC27 ST Str general 82 PIOC27 ST Op general 83 PIOC28 ST Str general 84 PIOC28 ST Op general 85 PIOC29 ST Str general 86 PIOC29 ST Op general 87 PIOC30 ST ...

Страница 632: ... general 178 PTOC3 ST Op general 179 PTOC4 ST Str general 180 PTOC4 ST Op general 181 PTOC5 ST Str general Enumeration IEC 61850 report dataset items 182 PTOC5 ST Op general 183 PTOC6 ST Str general 184 PTOC6 ST Op general 185 PTOC7 ST Str general 186 PTOC7 ST Op general 187 PTOC8 ST Str general 188 PTOC8 ST Op general 189 PTOC9 ST Str general 190 PTOC9 ST Op general 191 PTOC10 ST Str general 192 ...

Страница 633: ... RBRF4 ST OpIn general 287 RBRF5 ST OpEx general Enumeration IEC 61850 report dataset items 288 RBRF5 ST OpIn general 289 RBRF6 ST OpEx general 290 RBRF6 ST OpIn general 291 RBRF7 ST OpEx general 292 RBRF7 ST OpIn general 293 RBRF8 ST OpEx general 294 RBRF8 ST OpIn general 295 RBRF9 ST OpEx general 296 RBRF9 ST OpIn general 297 RBRF10 ST OpEx general 298 RBRF10 ST OpIn general 299 RBRF11 ST OpEx g...

Страница 634: ... Pos stVal 391 CSWI23 ST Loc stVal 392 CSWI23 ST Pos stVal 393 CSWI24 ST Loc stVal Enumeration IEC 61850 report dataset items 394 CSWI24 ST Pos stVal 395 CSWI25 ST Loc stVal 396 CSWI25 ST Pos stVal 397 CSWI26 ST Loc stVal 398 CSWI26 ST Pos stVal 399 CSWI27 ST Loc stVal 400 CSWI27 ST Pos stVal 401 CSWI28 ST Loc stVal 402 CSWI28 ST Pos stVal 403 CSWI29 ST Loc stVal 404 CSWI29 ST Pos stVal 405 CSWI30...

Страница 635: ...2 stVal 499 GGIO1 ST Ind93 stVal Enumeration IEC 61850 report dataset items 500 GGIO1 ST Ind94 stVal 501 GGIO1 ST Ind95 stVal 502 GGIO1 ST Ind96 stVal 503 GGIO1 ST Ind97 stVal 504 GGIO1 ST Ind98 stVal 505 GGIO1 ST Ind99 stVal 506 GGIO1 ST Ind100 stVal 507 GGIO1 ST Ind101 stVal 508 GGIO1 ST Ind102 stVal 509 GGIO1 ST Ind103 stVal 510 GGIO1 ST Ind104 stVal 511 GGIO1 ST Ind105 stVal 512 GGIO1 ST Ind10...

Страница 636: ... cVal mag f 603 MMXU2 MX VA phsA cVal mag f 604 MMXU2 MX VA phsB cVal mag f 605 MMXU2 MX VA phsC cVal mag f Enumeration IEC 61850 report dataset items 606 MMXU2 MX PF phsA cVal mag f 607 MMXU2 MX PF phsB cVal mag f 608 MMXU2 MX PF phsC cVal mag f 609 MMXU3 MX TotW mag f 610 MMXU3 MX TotVAr mag f 611 MMXU3 MX TotVA mag f 612 MMXU3 MX TotPF mag f 613 MMXU3 MX Hz mag f 614 MMXU3 MX PPV phsAB cVal mag...

Страница 637: ...8 MMXU5 MX W phsA cVal mag f 709 MMXU5 MX W phsB cVal mag f 710 MMXU5 MX W phsC cVal mag f 711 MMXU5 MX VAr phsA cVal mag f Enumeration IEC 61850 report dataset items 712 MMXU5 MX VAr phsB cVal mag f 713 MMXU5 MX VAr phsC cVal mag f 714 MMXU5 MX VA phsA cVal mag f 715 MMXU5 MX VA phsB cVal mag f 716 MMXU5 MX VA phsC cVal mag f 717 MMXU5 MX PF phsA cVal mag f 718 MMXU5 MX PF phsB cVal mag f 719 MMX...

Страница 638: ...os stVal 809 XSWI11 ST Loc stVal 810 XSWI11 ST Pos stVal 811 XSWI12 ST Loc stVal 812 XSWI12 ST Pos stVal 813 XSWI13 ST Loc stVal 814 XSWI13 ST Pos stVal 815 XSWI14 ST Loc stVal 816 XSWI14 ST Pos stVal 817 XSWI15 ST Loc stVal Enumeration IEC 61850 report dataset items 818 XSWI15 ST Pos stVal 819 XSWI16 ST Loc stVal 820 XSWI16 ST Pos stVal 821 XSWI17 ST Loc stVal 822 XSWI17 ST Pos stVal 823 XSWI18 S...

Страница 639: ... Ind33 q 66 GGIO1 ST Ind33 stVal 67 GGIO1 ST Ind34 q 68 GGIO1 ST Ind34 stVal 69 GGIO1 ST Ind35 q Enumeration GOOSE dataset items 70 GGIO1 ST Ind35 stVal 71 GGIO1 ST Ind36 q 72 GGIO1 ST Ind36 stVal 73 GGIO1 ST Ind37 q 74 GGIO1 ST Ind37 stVal 75 GGIO1 ST Ind38 q 76 GGIO1 ST Ind38 stVal 77 GGIO1 ST Ind39 q 78 GGIO1 ST Ind39 stVal 79 GGIO1 ST Ind40 q 80 GGIO1 ST Ind40 stVal 81 GGIO1 ST Ind41 q 82 GGIO...

Страница 640: ...q 172 GGIO1 ST Ind86 stVal 173 GGIO1 ST Ind87 q 174 GGIO1 ST Ind87 stVal 175 GGIO1 ST Ind88 q Enumeration GOOSE dataset items 176 GGIO1 ST Ind88 stVal 177 GGIO1 ST Ind89 q 178 GGIO1 ST Ind89 stVal 179 GGIO1 ST Ind90 q 180 GGIO1 ST Ind90 stVal 181 GGIO1 ST Ind91 q 182 GGIO1 ST Ind91 stVal 183 GGIO1 ST Ind92 q 184 GGIO1 ST Ind92 stVal 185 GGIO1 ST Ind93 q 186 GGIO1 ST Ind93 stVal 187 GGIO1 ST Ind94 ...

Страница 641: ...t cVal ang f Enumeration GOOSE dataset items 282 MMXU1 MX W phsA cVal mag f 283 MMXU1 MX W phsB cVal mag f 284 MMXU1 MX W phsC cVal mag f 285 MMXU1 MX VAr phsA cVal mag f 286 MMXU1 MX VAr phsB cVal mag f 287 MMXU1 MX VAr phsC cVal mag f 288 MMXU1 MX VA phsA cVal mag f 289 MMXU1 MX VA phsB cVal mag f 290 MMXU1 MX VA phsC cVal mag f 291 MMXU1 MX PF phsA cVal mag f 292 MMXU1 MX PF phsB cVal mag f 293...

Страница 642: ...MX PhV phsC cVal ang f 385 MMXU4 MX A phsA cVal mag f 386 MMXU4 MX A phsA cVal ang f 387 MMXU4 MX A phsB cVal mag f Enumeration GOOSE dataset items 388 MMXU4 MX A phsB cVal ang f 389 MMXU4 MX A phsC cVal mag f 390 MMXU4 MX A phsC cVal ang f 391 MMXU4 MX A neut cVal mag f 392 MMXU4 MX A neut cVal ang f 393 MMXU4 MX W phsA cVal mag f 394 MMXU4 MX W phsB cVal mag f 395 MMXU4 MX W phsC cVal mag f 396 ...

Страница 643: ... AnIn7 mag f 486 GGIO4 MX AnIn8 mag f 487 GGIO4 MX AnIn9 mag f 488 GGIO4 MX AnIn10 mag f 489 GGIO4 MX AnIn11 mag f 490 GGIO4 MX AnIn12 mag f 491 GGIO4 MX AnIn13 mag f 492 GGIO4 MX AnIn14 mag f 493 GGIO4 MX AnIn15 mag f Enumeration GOOSE dataset items 494 GGIO4 MX AnIn16 mag f 495 GGIO4 MX AnIn17 mag f 496 GGIO4 MX AnIn18 mag f 497 GGIO4 MX AnIn19 mag f 498 GGIO4 MX AnIn20 mag f 499 GGIO4 MX AnIn21...

Страница 644: ... ST Op general 597 PIOC14 ST Str general 598 PIOC14 ST Op general 599 PIOC15 ST Str general Enumeration GOOSE dataset items 600 PIOC15 ST Op general 601 PIOC16 ST Str general 602 PIOC16 ST Op general 603 PIOC17 ST Str general 604 PIOC17 ST Op general 605 PIOC18 ST Str general 606 PIOC18 ST Op general 607 PIOC19 ST Str general 608 PIOC19 ST Op general 609 PIOC20 ST Str general 610 PIOC20 ST Op gene...

Страница 645: ...C66 ST Str general 702 PIOC66 ST Op general 703 PIOC67 ST Str general 704 PIOC67 ST Op general 705 PIOC68 ST Str general Enumeration GOOSE dataset items 706 PIOC68 ST Op general 707 PIOC69 ST Str general 708 PIOC69 ST Op general 709 PIOC70 ST Str general 710 PIOC70 ST Op general 711 PIOC71 ST Str general 712 PIOC71 ST Op general 713 PIOC72 ST Str general 714 PIOC72 ST Op general 715 PTOC1 ST Str g...

Страница 646: ... Str general 810 PTUV8 ST Op general 811 PTUV9 ST Str general Enumeration GOOSE dataset items 812 PTUV9 ST Op general 813 PTUV10 ST Str general 814 PTUV10 ST Op general 815 PTUV11 ST Str general 816 PTUV11 ST Op general 817 PTUV12 ST Str general 818 PTUV12 ST Op general 819 PTUV13 ST Str general 820 PTUV13 ST Op general 821 RBRF1 ST OpEx general 822 RBRF1 ST OpIn general 823 RBRF2 ST OpEx general ...

Страница 647: ...12 CSWI12 ST Pos stVal 913 CSWI13 ST Loc stVal 914 CSWI13 ST Pos stVal 915 CSWI14 ST Loc stVal 916 CSWI14 ST Pos stVal 917 CSWI15 ST Loc stVal Enumeration GOOSE dataset items 918 CSWI15 ST Pos stVal 919 CSWI16 ST Loc stVal 920 CSWI16 ST Pos stVal 921 CSWI17 ST Loc stVal 922 CSWI17 ST Pos stVal 923 CSWI18 ST Loc stVal 924 CSWI18 ST Pos stVal 925 CSWI19 ST Loc stVal 926 CSWI19 ST Pos stVal 927 CSWI2...

Страница 648: ...os stVal 985 XSWI19 ST Loc stVal 986 XSWI19 ST Pos stVal 987 XSWI20 ST Loc stVal 988 XSWI20 ST Pos stVal 989 XSWI21 ST Loc stVal 990 XSWI21 ST Pos stVal 991 XSWI22 ST Loc stVal 992 XSWI22 ST Pos stVal 993 XSWI23 ST Loc stVal 994 XSWI23 ST Pos stVal 995 XSWI24 ST Loc stVal 996 XSWI24 ST Pos stVal 997 XCBR1 ST Loc stVal 998 XCBR1 ST Pos stVal 999 XCBR2 ST Loc stVal 1000 XCBR2 ST Pos stVal 1001 XCBR3...

Страница 649: ...cturing Message Specification MMS at the upper application layer for transfer of real time data This protocol has been in existence for several of years and provides a set of services suitable for the transfer of data within a substation LAN environment Actual MMS protocol services are mapped to IEC 61850 abstract ser vices in IEC 61850 8 1 The T60 relay supports IEC 61850 server services over bot...

Страница 650: ...plorer window click the Tools menu and access the SISCO File Transfer Utility 2 Select the Remote AR Name from the drop down list Available files appear in the File Specification area on the right side of the window 3 With the Copy option active select a file to transfer and click the Go button The file is copied and displays in the Local list on the left side of the window 4 Repeat the process to...

Страница 651: ...used for SOE logs since the buffering capability reduces the chances of missing data state changes Unbuffered reporting should generally be used for local status display C 2 3 GGIO2 DIGITAL CONTROL VALUES The GGIO2 logical node is available to provide access to the T60 virtual inputs Virtual inputs are single point control binary values that can be written by clients They are generally used as con...

Страница 652: ...tor MMXU1 MX Hz frequency MMXU1 MX PPV phsAB phase AB voltage magnitude and angle MMXU1 MX PPV phsBC phase BC voltage magnitude and angle MMXU1 MX PPV phsCA Phase CA voltage magnitude and angle MMXU1 MX PhV phsA phase AG voltage magnitude and angle MMXU1 MX PhV phsB phase BG voltage magnitude and angle MMXU1 MX PhV phsC phase CG voltage magnitude and angle MMXU1 MX A phsA phase A current magnitude...

Страница 653: ... locator function The XCBR logical node is directly associated with the breaker control feature XCBR1 ST Loc This is the state of the XCBR1 local remote switch A setting is provided to assign a FlexLogic oper and to determine the state When local mode is true IEC 61850 client commands will be rejected XCBR1 ST Opcnt This is an operation counter as defined in IEC 61850 Command settings are provided...

Страница 654: ...me of the last change of either the value or quality flags of the data item To accomplish this functionality all IEC 61850 data items must be regularly scanned for data changes and the timestamp updated when a change is detected regardless of the connection status of any IEC 61850 cli ents For applications where there is no IEC 61850 client in use the IEC 61850 SERVER SCANNING setting can be pro g...

Страница 655: ...nection for greater than two minutes the connection will be aborted by the T60 This frees up the con nection to be used by other clients Therefore when using IEC 61850 reporting clients should configure report control block items such that an integrity report will be issued at least every 2 minutes 120000 ms This ensures that the T60 will not abort the connection If other MMS data is being polled ...

Страница 656: ...n two pre defined data structures named DNA and UserSt Each DNA and UserSt item is referred to as a bit pair GSSE messages are transmit ted in response to state changes in any of the data points contained in the message GSSE messages always contain the same number of DNA and UserSt bit pairs Depending the on the configuration only some of these bit pairs may have val ues that are of interest to re...

Страница 657: ...quire GOOSE data transfer between UR series IEDs and devices from other manufacturers Fixed GOOSE is recommended for applications that require GOOSE data transfer between UR series IEDs IEC 61850 GOOSE messaging contains a number of configurable parameters all of which must be correct to achieve the successful transfer of data It is critical that the configured datasets at the transmission and rec...

Страница 658: ...an value and a floating point ana log value This matches the transmission dataset configuration above 2 Configure the GOOSE service settings by making the following changes in the INPUTS OUTPUTS REMOTE DEVICES REMOTE DEVICE 1 settings menu Set REMOTE DEVICE 1 ID to match the GOOSE ID string for the transmitting device Enter GOOSEOut_1 Set REMOTE DEVICE 1 ETYPE APPID to match the Ethertype applicat...

Страница 659: ...t set Thus if the local MAC address is 00 A0 F4 01 02 03 then the destination MAC address will be 01 A0 F4 01 02 03 C 4 6 GSSE ID AND GOOSE ID SETTINGS GSSE messages contain an identifier string used by receiving devices to identify the sender of the message defined in IEC 61850 part 8 1 as GsID This is a programmable 65 character string This string should be chosen to provide a descriptive name o...

Страница 660: ...uration process for IEC 61850 BDA Basic Data Attribute that is not structured DAI Instantiated Data Attribute DO Data Object type or instance depending on the context 842790A1 CDR Ethernet System configurator SCD file System specification tool SSD file System specification data ICD file 2 Process of creating ICD vendor 2 Creating ICD GE Multilin EnerVista UR Setup ICD file 1 IED UR series OR ICD f...

Страница 661: ...le SCD to set communication configuration parame ters that is required addresses reception GOOSE datasets IDs of incoming GOOSE datasets etc for the IED The IED configurator functionality is implemented in the GE Multilin EnerVista UR Setup software C 5 2 CONFIGURING IEC 61850 SETTINGS Before creating an ICD file the user can customize the IEC 61850 related settings for the IED For example the IED...

Страница 662: ...rators we recommend configuring transmission GOOSE for GE Multilin IEDs before creating the ICD and strictly within EnerVista UR Setup software or the front panel display access through the Settings Product Setup Com munications IEC 61850 GSSE GOOSE Configuration Transmission Tx Configurable GOOSE menu tree in EnerVista UR Setup Configurable reception GOOSE which includes eight configurable datase...

Страница 663: ...ress node contains the address parameters of the access point The GSE node provides the address element for stat ing the control block related address parameters where IdInst is the instance identification of the logical device within the IED on which the control block is located and cbName is the name of the control block The IED node describes the pre configuration of an IED its access points th...

Страница 664: ... DataSet name Other DataSet elements FCDA fc doName daName IdInst prefix InClass InInst Other FCDA elements DOI name SDI name Val Text Other DOI elements GSEControl name datSet type confRev appID LN InType InClass prefix inst DataSet name FCDA IdInst prefix InClass InInst doName fc Other FCDA elements ReportControl name datSet intgPd rptID confRev buffered TrgOps dchg OptFields seqNum RptEnabled O...

Страница 665: ... SDO The attribute DA has a func tional constraint and can either have a basic type be an enumeration or a structure of a DAType The DAType is built from BDA elements defining the structure elements which again can be BDA elements of have a base type such as DA Figure C 5 ICD FILE STRUCTURE DATATYPETEMPLATES NODE 842798A1 CDR DataTypeTemplates LNodeType id InClass DO name type Other LNodeType elem...

Страница 666: ...e procedure is pretty much the same First a substation project must be created either as an empty template or with some system information by importing a system specification file SSD Then IEDs are added to the substation Since each IED is represented by its associated ICD the ICD files are imported into the substation project and the system configurator validates the ICD files during the importin...

Страница 667: ... file and its version and specifies options for the mapping of names to signals The Substation node describes the substation parameters Figure C 7 SCD FILE STRUCTURE SUBSTATION NODE 842791A1 CDR SCL Header id version revision toolID nameStructure IED Section IED 2 Communication IED Section IED 1 Substation Other IED Sections DataTypeTemplates 842792A1 CDR Substation EquipmentContainer VoltageLevel...

Страница 668: ...nectedAP node describes the IED access point connected to this sub network The Address node contains the address parameters of the access point The GSE node provides the address element for stat ing the control block related address parameters where IdInst is the instance identification of the logical device within the IED on which the control block is located and cbName is the name of the control...

Страница 669: ...pdate the T60 with the new configuration from an SCD file with the EnerVista UR Setup software 1 Right click anywhere in the files panel and select the Import Contents From SCD File item 2 Select the saved SCD file and click Open 842794A1 CDR IED Section IED 1 AccessPoint name Server Authentication none LDevice inst LN0 InType InClass inst DataSet elements DOI elements Inputs GSEControl elements R...

Страница 670: ...n one GE Multilin IED defined in the SCD file the software prompt the user to save a UR series set tings file for each IED 4 After the URS file is created modify any settings if required 5 To update the relay with the new settings right click on the settings file in the settings tree and select the Write Set tings File to Device item 6 The software will prompt for the target device Select the targ...

Страница 671: ... SCSM IEC 61850 9 2 used B24 SCSM other GENERIC SUBSTATION EVENT MODEL GSE B31 Publisher side O Yes B32 Subscriber side Yes TRANSMISSION OF SAMPLED VALUE MODEL SVC B41 Publisher side O B42 Subscriber side SERVICES SERVER PUBLISHER UR FAMILY IF SERVER SIDE B11 SUPPORTED M1 Logical device c2 Yes M2 Logical node c3 Yes M3 Data c4 Yes M4 Data set c5 Yes M5 Substitution O M6 Setting group control O REP...

Страница 672: ...data set name M8 5 data reference M8 6 BufTm M8 7 IntgPd M8 8 GI Logging O M9 Log control O M9 1 IntgPd M10 Log O M11 Control M Yes IF GSE B31 32 IS SUPPORTED GOOSE O Yes M12 1 entryID M12 2 DataReflnc M13 GSSE O Yes IF SVC B41 B42 IS SUPPORTED M14 Multicast SVC O M15 Unicast SVC O M16 Time M Yes M17 File transfer O Yes SERVICES AA TP MC SERVER PUBLISHER UR FAMILY SERVER CLAUSE 6 S1 ServerDirector...

Страница 673: ...g change qchg S24 3 data update dupd S25 GetBRCBValues TP c6 Yes S26 SetBRCBValues TP c6 Yes UNBUFFERED REPORT CONTROL BLOCK URCB S27 Report TP c6 Yes S27 1 data change dchg Yes S27 2 qchg change qchg S27 3 data update dupd S28 GetURCBValues TP c6 Yes S29 SetURCBValues TP c6 Yes LOGGING CLAUSE 14 LOG CONTROL BLOCK S30 GetLCBValues TP M S31 SetLCBValues TP M LOG S32 QueryLogByTime TP M S33 QueryLog...

Страница 674: ... SVC CLAUSE 16 MULTICAST SVC S45 SendMSVMessage MC c10 S46 GetMSVCBValues TP O S47 SetMSVCBValues TP O UNICAST SVC S48 SendUSVMessage MC c10 S49 GetUSVCBValues TP O S50 SetUSVCBValues TP O CONTROL CLAUSE 16 4 8 S51 Select O Yes S52 SelectWithValue TP O S53 Cancel TP O Yes S54 Operate TP M Yes S55 Command Termination TP O S56 TimeActivated Operate TP O FILE TRANSFER CLAUSE 20 S57 GetFile TP M Yes S...

Страница 675: ... change of frequency PHAR Harmonic restraint PHIZ Ground detector PIOC Instantaneous overcurrent Yes PMRI Motor restart inhibition PMSS Motor starting time supervision POPF Over power factor PPAM Phase angle measuring PSCH Protection scheme PSDE Sensitive directional earth fault PTEF Transient earth fault PTOC Time overcurrent Yes PTOF Overfrequency PTOV Overvoltage Yes PTRC Protection trip condit...

Страница 676: ...O Voltage control M LOGICAL NODES FOR METERING AND MEASUREMENT MDIF Differential measurements MHAI Harmonics or interharmonics MHAN Non phase related harmonics or interharmonic MMTR Metering MMXN Non phase related measurement Yes MMXU Measurement Yes MSQI Sequence and imbalance MSTA Metering statistics S LOGICAL NODES FOR SENSORS AND MONITORING SARC Monitoring and diagnostics for arcs SIMG Insulat...

Страница 677: ...ttery ZBSH Bushing ZCAB Power cable ZCAP Capacitor bank ZCON Converter ZGEN Generator ZGIL Gas insulated line ZLIN Power overhead line ZMOT Motor ZREA Reactor ZRRC Rotating reactive component ZSAR Surge arrestor ZTCF Thyristor controlled frequency converter ZTRC Thyristor controlled reactive component Table C 1 IEC 61850 LOGICAL NODES Sheet 3 of 3 NODES UR FAMILY ...

Страница 678: ...C 30 T60 Transformer Protection System GE Multilin C 7 LOGICAL NODES APPENDIX C C ...

Страница 679: ...change Circuit V 24 V 28 Recommended if 1200 bits s Balanced Interchange Circuit X 24 X 27 100 bits sec 200 bits sec 300 bits sec 600 bits sec 1200 bits sec 2400 bits sec 4800 bits sec 9600 bits sec 2400 bits sec 4800 bits sec 9600 bits sec 19200 bits sec 38400 bits sec 56000 bits sec 64000 bits sec Unbalanced Interchange Circuit V 24 V 28 Standard Unbalanced Interchange Circuit V 24 V 28 Recommen...

Страница 680: ... indicate the following used in standard direction not used cannot be selected in IEC 60870 5 104 standard Process information in monitor direction 1 Single point information M_SP_NA_1 2 Single point information with time tag M_SP_TA_1 3 Double point information M_DP_NA_1 4 Double point information with time tag M_DP_TA_1 5 Step position information M_ST_NA_1 6 Step position information with time ...

Страница 681: ...ents of protection equipment with time tag CP56Time2a M_EP_TE_1 40 Packed output circuit information of protection equipment with time tag CP56Time2a M_EP_TF_1 45 Single command C_SC_NA_1 46 Double command C_DC_NA_1 47 Regulating step command C_RC_NA_1 48 Set point command normalized value C_SE_NA_1 49 Set point command scaled value C_SE_NB_1 50 Set point command short floating point value C_SE_NC...

Страница 682: ...all directory select file call file call section F_SC_NA_1 123 Last section last segment F_LS_NA_1 124 Ack file ack section F_AF_NA_1 125 Segment F_SG_NA_1 126 Directory blank or X available only in monitor standard direction C_CD_NA_1 TYPE IDENTIFICATION CAUSE OF TRANSMISSION NO MNEMONIC 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 20 to 36 37 to 41 44 45 46 47 1 M_SP_NA_1 X X X X X 2 M_SP_TA_1 3 M_DP_NA_1 4 M_...

Страница 683: ...RC_NA_1 48 C_SE_NA_1 49 C_SE_NB_1 50 C_SE_NC_1 51 C_BO_NA_1 58 C_SC_TA_1 X X X X X 59 C_DC_TA_1 60 C_RC_TA_1 TYPE IDENTIFICATION CAUSE OF TRANSMISSION NO MNEMONIC 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 20 to 36 37 to 41 44 45 46 47 PERIODIC CYCLIC BACKGROUND SCAN SPONTANEOUS INITIALIZED REQUEST OR REQUESTED ACTIVATION ACTIVATION CONFIRMATION DEACTIVATION DEACTIVATION CONFIRMATION ACTIVATION TERMINATION RET...

Страница 684: ..._1 112 P_ME_NC_1 X X X 113 P_AC_NA_1 120 F_FR_NA_1 121 F_SR_NA_1 122 F_SC_NA_1 123 F_LS_NA_1 124 F_AF_NA_1 125 F_SG_NA_1 126 F_DR_TA_1 TYPE IDENTIFICATION CAUSE OF TRANSMISSION NO MNEMONIC 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 20 to 36 37 to 41 44 45 46 47 PERIODIC CYCLIC BACKGROUND SCAN SPONTANEOUS INITIALIZED REQUEST OR REQUESTED ACTIVATION ACTIVATION CONFIRMATION DEACTIVATION DEACTIVATION CONFIRMATION ...

Страница 685: ...ng point number M_ME_NC_1 M_ME_TC_1 and M_ME_TF_1 Station interrogation Clock synchronization Clock synchronization optional see Clause 7 6 Command transmission Direct command transmission Direct setpoint command transmission Select and execute command Select and execute setpoint command C_SE ACTTERM used No additional definition Short pulse duration duration determined by a system parameter in th...

Страница 686: ...equences of events Transmission of sequences of recorded analog values File transfer in control direction Transparent file Background scan Background scan Acquisition of transmission delay Acquisition of transmission delay Definition of time outs Maximum range of values for all time outs 1 to 255 s accuracy 1 s Maximum number of outstanding I format APDUs k and latest acknowledge APDUs w PARAMETER...

Страница 687: ... determined by the Internet Architecture Board IAB It offers a broad spectrum of actual standards used in the Inter net The suitable selection of documents from RFC 2200 defined in this standard for given projects has to be chosen by the user of this standard Ethernet 802 3 Serial X 21 interface Other selection s from RFC 2200 list below if selected D 1 2 POINT LIST The IEC 60870 5 104 data points...

Страница 688: ...D 10 T60 Transformer Protection System GE Multilin D 1 IEC 60870 5 104 PROTOCOL APPENDIX D D ...

Страница 689: ...ed in addition to the Highest DNP Levels Supported the complete list is described in the attached table Binary Inputs Object 1 Binary Input Changes Object 2 Binary Outputs Object 10 Control Relay Output Block Object 12 Binary Counters Object 20 Frozen Counters Object 21 Counter Change Event Object 22 Frozen Counter Event Object 23 Analog Inputs Object 30 Analog Input Changes Object 32 Analog Deadb...

Страница 690: ...Binary Outputs Never Always Sometimes Configurable SELECT OPERATE Never Always Sometimes Configurable DIRECT OPERATE Never Always Sometimes Configurable DIRECT OPERATE NO ACK Never Always Sometimes Configurable Count 1 Never Always Sometimes Configurable Pulse On Never Always Sometimes Configurable Pulse Off Never Always Sometimes Configurable Latch On Never Always Sometimes Configurable Latch Off...

Страница 691: ... Configurable Only certain objects Sometimes attach explanation ENABLE DISABLE unsolicited Function codes supported Sends Static Data in Unsolicited Responses Never When Device Restarts When Status Flags Change No other options are permitted Default Counter Object Variation No Counters Reported Configurable attach explanation Default Object 20 Default Variation 1 Point by point list attached Count...

Страница 692: ...p 17 28 index 3 Binary Input Change with Relative Time 1 read 06 no range or all 07 08 limited quantity 10 0 Binary Output Status Variation 0 is used to request default variation 1 read 00 01 start stop 06 no range or all 07 08 limited quantity 17 28 index 2 Binary Output Status 1 read 00 01 start stop 06 no range or all 07 08 limited quantity 17 28 index 129 response 00 01 start stop 17 28 index ...

Страница 693: ...ariation 0 is used to request default variation 1 read 06 no range or all 07 08 limited quantity 1 32 Bit Counter Change Event 1 read 06 no range or all 07 08 limited quantity 129 response 130 unsol resp 17 28 index 2 16 Bit Counter Change Event 1 read 06 no range or all 07 08 limited quantity 129 response 130 unsol resp 17 28 index 5 32 Bit Counter Change Event with Time 1 read 06 no range or all...

Страница 694: ...sponse 130 unsol resp 17 28 index 3 32 Bit Analog Change Event with Time 1 read 06 no range or all 07 08 limited quantity 129 response 130 unsol resp 17 28 index 4 16 Bit Analog Change Event with Time 1 read 06 no range or all 07 08 limited quantity 129 response 130 unsol resp 17 28 index 5 short floating point Analog Change Event without Time 1 read 06 no range or all 07 08 limited quantity 129 r...

Страница 695: ... close 30 abort 5b free format 129 response 130 unsol resp 5b free format 5 File transfer 1 read 2 write 5b free format 129 response 130 unsol resp 5b free format 6 File transfer status 129 response 130 unsol resp 5b free format 7 File descriptor 28 get file info 5b free format 129 response 130 unsol resp 5b free format 80 1 Internal Indications 1 read 00 01 start stop index 7 129 response 00 01 s...

Страница 696: ...n is performed on a binary counter point the frozen value is available in the corresponding frozen counter point BINARY INPUT POINTS Static Steady State Object Number 1 Change Event Object Number 2 Request Function Codes supported 1 read 22 assign class Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested 2 Binary Input with status Configurable Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requ...

Страница 697: ...rtual Input 15 15 Virtual Input 16 16 Virtual Input 17 17 Virtual Input 18 18 Virtual Input 19 19 Virtual Input 20 20 Virtual Input 21 21 Virtual Input 22 22 Virtual Input 23 23 Virtual Input 24 24 Virtual Input 25 25 Virtual Input 26 26 Virtual Input 27 27 Virtual Input 28 28 Virtual Input 29 29 Virtual Input 30 30 Virtual Input 31 31 Virtual Input 32 32 Virtual Input 33 33 Virtual Input 34 34 Vi...

Страница 698: ... freeze and clear noack 22 assign class Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested 1 32 Bit Binary Counter with Flag Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested 1 32 Bit Counter Change Event without time Change Event Buffer Size 10 Default Class for all points 3 FROZEN COUNTERS Static Steady State Object Number 21 Change Event Object Number 23 Request Function Codes suppor...

Страница 699: ... all Analog Input points are in the same units as the Analog Input quantity For example an Analog Input quantity measured in volts has a corresponding deadband in units of volts This is in conformance with DNP Technical Bul letin 9809 001 Analog Input Reporting Deadband Relay settings are available to set default deadband values according to data type Deadbands for individual Analog Input Points c...

Страница 700: ...E 12 T60 Transformer Protection System GE Multilin E 2 DNP POINT LISTS APPENDIX E E ...

Страница 701: ...0090 D1 3 2x 11 February 2003 URT 028 1601 0090 D2 3 2x 02 June 2003 URX 084 1601 0090 E1 3 3x 01 May 2003 URX 080 1601 0090 E2 3 3x 29 May 2003 URX 083 1601 0090 F1 3 4x 10 December 2003 URX 111 1601 0090 F2 3 4x 09 February 2004 URX 115 1601 0090 G1 4 0x 23 March 2004 URX 123 1601 0090 G2 4 0x 17 May 2004 URX 136 1601 0090 H1 4 2x 30 June 2004 URX 145 1601 0090 H2 4 2x 23 July 2004 URX 151 1601 ...

Страница 702: ...tion 30009 2 2 Update Updated order codes 3 10 3 10 Update Updated CPU module 9H in Figure 3 12 Typical Wiring Diagram 3 18 3 18 Update Updated Figure 3 17 Contact Input and Output Module Wiring to include surge on module 67 3 24 3 24 Update Updated section 3 2 9 CPU Communication Ports section 3 24 3 24 Update Updated RS485 PORTS section 3 27 3 27 Update Updated Figure 3 26 Options for IRIG B Con...

Страница 703: ...SHOT section A 1 A 1 Update Updated FLEXANALOG PARAMETERS section B 8 B 8 Update Updated MODBUS MEMORY MAP section C 3 C 3 Update Updated PROTECTION AND OTHER LOGICAL NODES section Table F 3 MAJOR UPDATES FOR T60 MANUAL REVISION V2 PAGE V1 PAGE V2 CHANGE DESCRIPTION Title Title Update Manual part number to 1601 0090 V2 2 3 2 3 Update Updated ORDERING section 3 24 3 24 Update Updated RS485 PORTS se...

Страница 704: ...NERAL TRANSFORMER SETTINGS section 5 89 5 89 Update Updated DISCONNECT SWITCHES section 5 133 5 131 Update Updated GROUND DISTANCE section 5 153 5 151 Update Updated PERCENT DIFFERENTIAL section 5 175 5 175 Update Updated NEUTRAL DIRECTIONAL OVERCURRENT section 5 224 5 225 Update Updated VT FUSE FAILURE section A 1 A 1 Update Updated FLEXANALOG ITEMS section C 7 C 7 Update Updated CONFIGURABLE GOO...

Страница 705: ...GITAL ELEMENTS section 5 223 5 226 Update Updated VT FUSE FAILURE section 5 228 5 231 Update Updated CONTACT OUTPUTS section 5 243 Add Added IEC 61850 GOOSE ANALOGS section 5 244 Add Added IEC 61850 GOOSE INTEGERS section 5 247 Add Added RRTD INPUTS section 6 8 Add Added IEC 61850 GOOSE INTEGERS section 6 13 6 13 Update Updated DIFFERENTIAL AND RESTRAINT CURRENTS section 7 2 7 3 Update Updated REL...

Страница 706: ...al part number to 1601 0090 S2 3 40 3 40 Update Updated MANAGED ETHERNET SWITCH OVERVIEW section 3 40 3 40 Update Updated MANAGED ETHERNET SWITCH MODULE HARDWARE section 3 43 Add Added UPLOADING T60 SWITCH MODULE FIRMWARE sub section 3 43 Add Added SELECTING THE PROPER SWITCH FIRMWARE VERSION sub section Table F 10 MAJOR UPDATES FOR T60 MANUAL REVISION S1 Sheet 1 of 2 PAGE R3 PAGE S1 CHANGE DESCRI...

Страница 707: ...R2 Table F 13 MAJOR UPDATES FOR T60 MANUAL REVISION R1 Sheet 1 of 2 PAGE P2 PAGE R1 CHANGE DESCRIPTION Title Title Update Manual part number to 1601 0090 R1 2 3 2 3 Update Updated ORDERING section 2 8 2 8 Update Updated PROTECTION ELEMENTS specifications section 3 1 3 1 Update Updated PANEL CUTOUT section 3 4 3 5 Update Updated MODULE WITHDRAWAL AND INSERTION section 3 6 3 9 Update Updated TYPICAL...

Страница 708: ...d SELF TEST ERROR MESSAGES table A 1 A 1 Update Updated FLEXANALOG PARAMETERS table Table F 15 MAJOR UPDATES FOR T60 MANUAL REVISION P1 PAGE N2 PAGE P1 CHANGE DESCRIPTION Title Title Update Manual part number to 1601 0090 P1 2 3 2 3 Update Updated ORDERING section 3 6 3 6 Update Updated TYPICAL WIRING DIAGRAM to 828749A5 3 30 3 30 Update Updated TIMING CONFIGURATION FOR RS422 TWO CHANNEL 3 TERMINA...

Страница 709: ...ETTINGS sub section 5 77 5 78 Update Updated FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS table 8 14 Add Added TESTING UNDERFREQUENCY AND OVERFREQUENCY ELEMENTS section B 8 B 8 Update Updated MODBUS MEMORY MAP section C 1 C 1 Update Updated IEC 61850 COMMUNICATIONS section Table F 17 MAJOR UPDATES FOR T60 MANUAL REVISION N1 PAGE M2 PAGE N1 CHANGE DESCRIPTION Title Title Update Manual part number to 1601 0090 N1 5 18 5 18 U...

Страница 710: ...ated INPUTS specifications section 2 12 2 12 Update Updated COMMUNICATIONS specifications section 3 8 3 7 Update Updated CONTROL POWER section 3 10 3 10 Update Updated CONTACT INPUTS OUTPUTS section 3 18 3 18 Update Updated CPU COMMUNICATIONS PORTS section 3 19 3 20 Update Updated RS485 SERIAL CONNECTION diagram 3 24 3 25 Update Updated G 703 INTERFACE section 3 29 3 30 Update Updated RS422 AND FI...

Страница 711: ... CODES table 3 6 3 6 Update Updated TYPICAL WIRING DIAGRAM to 828749A3 3 19 3 19 Update Updated RS485 SERIAL CONNECTION diagram to 827757A7 5 8 5 8 Update Updated DISPLAY PROPERTIES section 5 13 5 13 Update Updated DNP PROTOCOL sub section 5 15 5 15 Update Updated IEC 61850 PROTOCOL sub section 5 133 5 134 Update Updated DIGITAL ELEMENTS section 5 143 5 144 Update The LATCHING OUTPUTS section is n...

Страница 712: ...Detector FDH Fault Detector high set FDL Fault Detector low set FLA Full Load Current FO Fiber Optic FREQ Frequency FSK Frequency Shift Keying FTP File Transfer Protocol FxE FlexElement FWD Forward G Generator GE General Electric GND Ground GNTR Generator GOOSE General Object Oriented Substation Event GPS Global Positioning System HARM Harmonic Harmonics HCT High Current Time HGF High Impedance Gr...

Страница 713: ...RTD Resistance Temperature Detector RTU Remote Terminal Unit RX Rx Receive Receiver s second S Sensitive SAT CT Saturation SBO Select Before Operate SCADA Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition SEC Secondary SEL Select Selector Selection SENS Sensitive SEQ Sequence SIR Source Impedance Ratio SNTP Simple Network Time Protocol SRC Source SSB Single Side Band SSEL Session Selector STATS Statistics ...

Страница 714: ...of 1 October 2013 GE Digital Energy warrants most of its GE manufactured products for 10 years For warranty details including any limitations and disclaimers see the GE Digital Energy Terms and Conditions at https www gedigitalenergy com multilin warranty htm For products shipped before 1 October 2013 the standard 24 month warranty applies ...

Страница 715: ...5 6 5 73 5 74 BATTERY FAILURE 7 8 BINARY INPUT POINTS E 8 BINARY OUTPUT POINTS E 9 BLOCK DIAGRAM 1 3 BLOCK SETTING 5 5 BREAKER ARCING CURRENT actual values 6 27 clearing 5 14 7 2 FlexLogic operands 5 123 logic 5 250 measurement 5 250 Modbus registers B 40 settings 5 249 specifications 2 13 BREAKER CONTROL control of 2 breakers 4 24 description 4 23 dual breaker logic 5 93 5 94 FlexLogic operands 5...

Страница 716: ...18 3 11 CSA APPROVAL 2 22 CT BANKS settings 5 73 CT INPUTS 3 13 5 6 5 73 CT WIRING 3 13 CURRENT BANK 5 73 CURRENT DEMAND 5 47 CURRENT DIFFERENTIAL Modbus registers B 16 CURRENT ELEMENTS 5 181 CURRENT HARMONICS 2 16 CURRENT METERING actual values 6 15 specifications 2 15 CURVES definite time 5 185 5 217 FlexCurves 5 98 5 185 I2T 5 185 IAC 5 184 IEC 5 183 IEEE 5 182 inverse time undervoltage 5 217 t...

Страница 717: ...ry output points E 9 control relay output blocks E 9 device profile document E 1 frozen counters E 10 implementation table E 4 Modbus registers B 25 settings 5 19 DUPLEX HALF B 1 E EAC CERTIFICATION 2 22 EGD PROTOCOL actual values 6 9 Modbus registers B 46 settings 5 38 ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE 2 21 ELEMENTS 5 4 END OF LIFE 10 4 ENERGY METERING actual values 6 18 Modbus registers B 14 specification...

Страница 718: ...15 outputs 3 14 3 15 specifications 2 18 FORM C RELAY outputs 3 14 specifications 2 18 FREQUENCY METERING actual values 6 20 Modbus registers B 14 settings 5 75 specifications 2 16 FREQUENCY RATE OF CHANGE Modbus registers B 12 FREQUENCY TRACKING 5 75 6 21 FREQUENCY NOMINAL 5 75 FUNCTION SETTING 5 5 FUNCTIONS 2 3 FUSE 2 17 FUSE FAILURE see VT FUSE FAILURE G G 703 3 32 3 33 3 34 3 37 G 703 WIRE SIZ...

Страница 719: ... INTER RELAY COMMUNICATIONS 2 20 INTRODUCTION 1 2 INVERSE TIME UNDERVOLTAGE 5 218 IOC see PHASE GROUND and NEUTRAL IOC entries IP ADDRESS 5 18 IRIG B connection 3 27 error messages 7 9 settings 5 42 specifications 2 17 2 18 ISO 9000 REGISTRATION 2 22 K KEYPAD 1 17 4 23 L LAMPTEST 7 3 LANGUAGE 5 13 LASER MODULE 3 31 LATCHING OUTPUTS application example 5 269 5 270 error messages 7 9 settings 5 268 ...

Страница 720: ...logic 5 221 Modbus registers B 45 settings 5 221 specifications 2 12 NEUTRAL TIME OVERCURRENT see entry for NEUTRAL TOC NEUTRAL TOC FlexLogic operands 5 125 logic 5 194 Modbus registers B 34 settings 5 194 specifications 2 11 NON VOLATILE LATCHES FlexLogic operands 5 125 Modbus registers B 54 settings 5 142 specifications 2 14 NSAP ADDRESS 5 18 O ONE SHOTS 5 131 OPERATING TEMPERATURE 2 20 OPERATIN...

Страница 721: ...ntry for SYNCHROPHASOR PHASE OVERVOLTAGE FlexLogic operands 5 126 logic 5 220 Modbus registers B 38 settings 5 220 specifications 2 12 PHASE ROTATION 5 75 PHASE TIME OVERCURRENT see entry for PHASE TOC PHASE TOC FlexLogic operands 5 126 logic 5 187 Modbus registers B 33 settings 5 186 specifications 2 11 PHASE UNDERVOLTAGE FlexLogic operands 5 126 logic 5 219 Modbus registers B 38 settings 5 219 s...

Страница 722: ...on 3 26 specifications 2 19 RTD INPUTS actual values 6 24 Modbus registers B 20 B 32 settings 5 284 5 286 specifications 2 16 S SALES OFFICE 1 1 SAVING SETTING DOES NOT TAKE RELAY OUT OF SERVICE 5 9 8 2 SCAN OPERATION 1 4 SECURITY delete files and records 10 1 SELECTOR SWITCH actual values 6 7 application example 5 235 FlexLogic operands 5 127 logic 5 236 Modbus registers B 53 settings 5 231 speci...

Страница 723: ...HERMAL DEMAND CHARACTERISTIC 5 48 THERMAL INPUTS Modbus registers B 36 settings 5 90 THERMAL OVERLOAD PROTECTION Modbus registers B 42 settings 5 259 specifications 2 13 TIME 7 2 TIME OVERCURRENT see PHASE NEUTRAL and GROUND TOC entries TIMERS 5 137 TOC ground 5 202 neutral 5 194 phase 5 186 specifications 2 11 TRACEABILITY data 4 12 4 13 8 13 8 14 overview 4 11 8 12 rules 4 13 8 14 TRACKING FREQU...

Страница 724: ...5 267 Modbus registers B 9 B 61 settings 5 267 VIRTUAL OUTPUTS actual values 6 6 FlexLogic operands 5 129 Modbus registers B 63 settings 5 270 VOLTAGE BANKS 5 74 VOLTAGE DEVIATIONS 2 21 VOLTAGE ELEMENTS 5 217 VOLTAGE METERING specifications 2 15 values 6 16 VOLTAGE RESTRAINT CHARACTERISTIC 5 186 VOLTS PER HERTZ actual values 6 24 curves 5 225 FlexLogic operands 5 128 logic 5 225 Modbus registers B...

Отзывы:

Нет отзывов

Похожие инструкции для UR T60

Hama D-86651 Manual preview
D-86651
Бренд: Hama Страницы: 8
OBO Bettermann isCon System Instructions preview
isCon
Бренд: OBO Bettermann Страницы: 68
Bornack FALLSTOP FS BK User Manual preview
FALLSTOP FS BK
Бренд: Bornack Страницы: 32
Liebert AccuVar ACV Series Installation, Operation And Maintenance Manual preview
AccuVar ACV Series
Бренд: Liebert Страницы: 13
Electrex PLUS Quick Start Manual preview
PLUS
Бренд: Electrex Страницы: 2
Medion MD 61059 User Manual preview
MD 61059
Бренд: Medion Страницы: 43
Caleffi solar SP10 Manual preview
SP10
Бренд: Caleffi solar Страницы: 4
ABB ESP M1R Installation Instructions Manual preview
ESP M1R
Бренд: ABB Страницы: 32
AKARI AX12 Owner'S Manual preview
AX12
Бренд: AKARI Страницы: 2
Respirex WORKMASTER MAXI DIELECTRIC OVERBOOT User Information preview
WORKMASTER MAXI DIELECTRIC OVERBOOT
Бренд: Respirex Страницы: 4
Toshiba ColorStream TP43H60 Service Manual preview
ColorStream TP43H60
Бренд: Toshiba Страницы: 4
American Innovations SurgeProtect Kit Quick Reference Manual preview
SurgeProtect Kit
Бренд: American Innovations Страницы: 2
American Innovations Lightning Arrester Surge Kit Quick Reference Manual preview
Lightning Arrester Surge Kit
Бренд: American Innovations Страницы: 2

Бренды по названию

Популярные бренды

Загрузить еще бренды